Home

Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area ee COIE E ER E Rear fuse box A CILA Power tailgate D Trailer socket 1 Electric parking brake left 30 side e E 12 g 2 Electric parking brake right 30 side e i Please consult a Volvo retailers Parts Heated rear window 30 e department for the most up to date speci ER Trailer socket 2 15 ee 08 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 341 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Vehicle care Washing the car The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car e The car should be washed at regular inter vals since dirt dust insects and tar spots adhere to the paint and may cause dam age To help prevent corrosion it is partic ularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime e Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight Doing so may cause detergents and wax to dry out and become abrasive To avoid scratching use lukewarm water to soften the dirt before you wash with a soft sponge and plenty of sudsy water e Bird droppings Remove from paintwork as soon as possible Otherwise the finish may be permanently damaged e A detergent can be used to facilitate the softening of dirt and oil e Dry the car with a clean chamois and remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels e Tar spots can be removed w
2. 116 117 Shiftlock overde A 117 Axle MECO uscar reitera 295 B Battery co 332 333 malntenancCe 332 remote key replacing ccesseceeeeees 61 SpeciicadO Suomi 358 SEENEN geeiert 331 BIE ue EE 11 Blind Spot Information System ER EEN 194 195 196 Bluetooth cell phone connection 233 Booster cushion mtegrated 49 Booster CUSMIONS vu ggpgebetugeges ee gegen ge eg ie 46 Brake Tei EEN 119 Brake system eebe 120 Brake pad mspechon 119 checking fluid level om m 320 emergency brake assistance 120 dl e MEN 357 general mtorrmaton 119 Hill Descent Control 125 warning TG EE 78 Bulbs cargo area Iobtimg KEEN 327 ACAI GTS EE 322 323 024 MOdUCHON EE 322 license plate Iohte uk 327 side marker obte ue 325 SDESCHI CANONS icsisrionica acid 328 He LEE 326 C Camera Park Ae 190 Capacity weight 295 Cargo area changing DulDS cocinas 327 steel QUI asaca eonan 275 Cargo area COVER iistivsssisictnoieecteneiccneesiesie 275 Cargo area net 276 Catalytic Converter 269 Cell phone hands free connection 233 Cell phone voice Control 241 Central locking system introduction 56 Check engine Joh 76 Child restraints recalls and registraton 39 Child restraint ovstems A 40 booster CUSMIONS carios 46 Convertible seate bk 44 date LE 42 ISOFIX LATCH anchors A 47 top tether anchors A 48 ING SAN EE 37 DOOSTE CUSHIONS sicario
3. Single sweep Bach Move the lever upward from position 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke at a time for as long as the lever is held up Intermittent wiping INT With the lever in this position you can set the wiper interval by twisting the thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed Continuous wiping VW The wipers operate at normal speed Ss The wipers operate at high speed Windshield wiper service position The windshield wipers must be in the service position before the wiper blades can be cleaned or replaced See page 329 for addi tional information Rain sensor The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper speed according to the amount of water on the windshield The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up 98 Option accessory for more information see Introduction the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre quently or down the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently oR The wipers will make an extra sweep each time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward When the rain sensor is activated the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor the vehicle must be running or in ignition mode ll and the windshield wiper lever must be in position O or in the single sweep position Activate the rain sens
4. Information Provided by ae 09 Specifications Label information Location of labels O CAR CORPORATION Muro LS Lon poration tc mocni An VEMS D ON DONI ROL nyi KAN NEIE NOIN Conforms to renilatinne U S E vCanads T225 LNV fania LEY PC rama e a na a EEN a TIcucu VI H bit Wl AS y IES vv Sine KVUZ ULI Evar o WXRO132F 2 VeLve MFD BY VOLVO CAR CORPORATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY FRONT REAR ESCHER EEN DE SIEGES THTAL AVANT ARRI RE gt ae The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492kg or 1085lbs Ss RI Le poids total des occupants et des marchandises ne doit jamais d passer 492kg ou 1085lb d y MS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL M THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN N THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNERS DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES MANUAL FOR PNEUS A FROID ADDITIONAL 22 ouR IT Aus Po 20psi INFORMATION VOIR LE MANUEL 298 50817 205kPa 30psi DE LUSAGER POUR PLUS DE DE 00h15 420kPa 61psi RENSEIGNEMENTS VOLVO 31201865 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION O SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 rhe ceases Hes mover olceca 492kg or 1085lbs SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNERS 257o PL7 oee MANUAL FOR 223 502147 EE ADDITIONAL 125 gor t ATKP INFORMATION VOLVO 31201864 G045022 350 00 11 L
5. Automatic standby mode when ACC changes target vehicles bd o o 0 If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly there may be a stationary vehicle ahead The following only applies at speeds below approximately 18 mph 30 km h If ACC changes target vehicles the vehicle that the radar sensor has detected from a moving vehicle to a stationary one the system will apply the brakes in your vehicle WARNING At speeds above 18 mph 30 km h ACC will not react to a stationary vehicle and apply the brakes but will instead accelerate to the previously set speed The driver must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if e Your vehicle s speed goes below 10 mph 15 km h and ACC cannot determine if the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other type of object such as e g a speed bump e Your vehicle s speed goes below 10 mph 15 km h and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow No automatic braking when at a standstill In certain situations ACC will no longer apply the brakes and go into standby mode while the vehicle is not moving This means that the driver will have to apply the brakes This happens if e The driver presses the brake pedal The parking brake is activated O e The gear selected is moved to P N or R The driver presses the button to put ACC in standby mode The parking
6. Never fill above the level mark in the cell Changing o o o KE e O V d G040861 N o 3 E o 08 Maintenance and specifications information in the vehicle s electrical system can be stored in the control modules D Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover EJ Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free e S Y o Remove the rear cover by pulling it away El E Detach the black negative cable 2 Move the battery inward and to the side Ed Detach the red positive cable until it reaches the rear edge of the box rh Detachiheventilation hesedronm ine 3 Tighten the clamp that secures the battery battery 4 Connect the ventilation hose E Loosen the screw holding the battery gt Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle s 3 clamp E body e M th ttery to the si lift it up e SESCH 5 Connect the red positive cable WARNING WARNING 6 Connect the black negative cable Connect and disconnect the positive and PROPOSITION 65 WARNING fs Pressintherkar cover 966 Removal negative cables in the correct sequence Battery posts terminals and related acces 8 Reinstall the molding See Removal sories contain lead and lead compounds 9 Reinstall the front cover and secure it with Removal chemicals known to the state of California the clips See Removal Switch off the ignition remove the remote key t
7. Remove the wheel cover where applica ble using the removal tool or remove the wheel cover by hand Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones 07 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel zi Q a E Es E st 2 S 3 st Q o Jack attachment points 7 There are two jack attachment points on Lug wrench and towing eyelet each side of the vehicle Position the jack 6 With the vehicle still on the ground use the i the illus 5 Screw the towing eyelet into the lug lug wrench towing eyelet to loosen the A a a tration and crank while simultaneously wrench as shown in the illustration wheel nuts Y 1 turn by exerting down guiding the base of the jack to the ground ward counterclockwise pressure Theb Ett t be flat level D CAUTION e base of the jack must be fla on a level firm non slippery surface Before raising The towing eyelet must be screwed into the the vehicle check that the jack is still cor lug wrench as far as possible rectly positioned in the attachment 07 gt gt Changing a wheel E t N ei E 0 There are two attachment points near the rear of the vehicle Only the rear most attachment point is intended for the jack see the illustration 8 Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground 9 Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and remove the wheel 07 WARNING
8. e By pressing the rubber covered button under the outer handle on the tailgate The taillights illuminate automatically when the automatic open function is used kk i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 271 06 06 During your trip CAUTION Be sure that there is adequate space above and behind the vehicle before opening the tailgate automatically The vehicle should not be driven or moved with the tailgate in the open position How ever if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate in the open position the automatic closing function will be inoperative until one of the following occurs e The tailgate is closed manually e The ignition is switched off and the key is removed for approximately 10 minutes the tailgate will function again after restart If the tailgate has been opened and closed continuously for more than 60 seconds the automatic function will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system The automatic function can be used again after approximately 10 minutes If the vehicle s battery has been discharged or disconnected the tailgate must be opened and closed once manually to reset the system Automatic closing The power tailgate can be closed by pressing the lt button on the tailgate see the illus tration or by pressing it down If the tailgate is pressed down e g by the weight of snow or strong wind it will close automatically
9. 06 Refueling tral locking button does not lock the fuel Opening closing the fuel filler door filler door e Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling e Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a click indicates that it is closed OD CAUTION e Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling In addition to causing damage to the environment gasolines containing alcohol can cause damage to painted surfaces which may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited War ranty se o ei KE e O The fuel filler door is located on the right rear fender indicated by an arrow beside the fuel tank symbol on the information display With the ignition switched off press and release the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks e If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled this feature enables you to lock the doors tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked e You can also keep the vehicle locked if you remain inside it during refueling The cen Manually opening the fuel filler door r Y q 3 o If necessary the fuel filler door can be opened manually 1 Open the side hatch
10. RESET reset the active function Used in certain cases to select activate a function see the explanation under each respective function The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever The menus shown depend on ignition mode Press READ to erase a message and return to the menus Menu overview Driving distance on current fuel reserve Average Instantaneous Average speed Current speed in mph Canadian models only Engine oil level Calibrate tire pressure Messages Time for regular SEPvice y p 32 F f When a warning information or indicator sym bol comes on a corresponding message appears on the information display An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among the messages If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer the message must be read and confirmed by pressing READ before the previous activity can be resumed Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage Contact an author ized Volvo work shop Stop safely Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage Contact an author ized Volvo work shop Stopping the engine Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop immedi ately Service urgent e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving plea
11. RSE USB menu USB menu Random Repeat folder DivX VOD code Select USB device Day Night mode Display off Reset all USB settings 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE RSE AUX menu Display off AUX menu AUX input volume Day Night mode Reset all Bluetooth settings Display off Reset all AUX settings RSE A V AUX menu A V AUX menu A V AUX input volume Day Night mode Display off Reset all A V AUX settings Ge RSE iPod menu iPod menu Random Day Night mode Display off Reset all iPod settings RSE Bluetooth menu Bluetooth menu Random Day Night mode w Option accessory for more information see Introduction 253 CS 05 Infotainment Remote control The remote control included with the Rear Seat Entertainment system RSE can be used to control all of the infotainment system s func Avoid exposing the remote control to strong sunlight for instance by leaving it on the dashboard This could cause problems with tions its batteries a NAV RADIO MEDIA TEL To use the remote begin by pressing its eegene Leen button to select a screen L left rear 44 gt C gt screen F front screen or R right rear screen Som Si Continue by pointing the remote toward the f vw Zo L dei R Select a screen L left rear F selected rear screen s IR transceiver see the front or R right rear illustration on page 245 or to the front screen s IR transceiver located to t
12. The feature Cell phone voice control Introduction The infotainment system s voice control fea ture enables the driver to voice activate cer tain functions in a Bluetooth connected cell phone or the navigation system The information in this section applies to using voice commands to operate a Bluetooth connected cell phone See also the section Bluetooth hands free connection beginning on page 233 for detailed information about using a cell phone with the vehicle s infotainment system The navigation system has a separate user s guide containing information about voice commands for operating that system Voice commands offer convenience and help avoid distractions so that you can concentrate on driving and focus your attention on road and traffic conditions WARNING As the driver you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle safely and adhering to all applicable traffic regulations The voice control feature provides access to a number of functions in the Bluetooth hands free and navigation systems while allowing you to keep your hands on the steering wheel Input is in dialogue form using spoken commands from the user and verbal prompts from the sys tem Voice control uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth hands free system see the illustration on page 233 and system prompts are provided through the infotainment sys tem s front speakers 1 Available in vehicles equipped with
13. Vanity mirror lighting Removing the mirror glass ei Ed SCH Es O 1 Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge in the center turn and carefully pry up the lug on the edge 2 Carefully detach and lift out the entire mir ror glass 3 Replace the bulb Reinstalling the mirror glass 1 Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir ror glass back into position 2 Press the three lower lugs back into posi tion 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs 08 kk 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs Lighting Wattage function Bulb specifications Lighting Wattage function Rear fog light P21W LL Eira gN SS SE Backup lights 2 P21W LL beam models with Active Brake lights 21 P21W LL Bending Lights Cargo area 10 SV8 5 lighting length Low beam 55 HII ee 43mm halogen High beam 65 H9 halogen Please consult a Volvo retailer s Parts Front turn sig 21 PYO1W a for the most up to date speci ications nals LL License plate 5 CSW LL lighting Vanity mirror T SV5 5 length 35mm Front side 5 W3W LL marker lights Glove com 5 SV8 5 08 partment length lighting 43mm len Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and specifications Wiper blades and washer fluid Wiper blades 4 With the remote key in the ignition slot put The windshield wiper blades are different the ignition in mode 0 lengt
14. WARNING Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated Interrupting automatic opening closing Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can be interrupted in four ways E By pressing the lt 3 button on the lighting panel By pressing the lt 3 button on the remote key e By pressing the button on the lower edge of the tailgate e By pressing the rubber covered button under the outer handle on the tailgate If one of these actions is taken the tailgate will stop and reopen Pinch protection If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being operated the pinch protection function is acti vated e If the tailgate is being opened the electri cal function will be switched off and the tailgate will be released from the electrical system e If the tailgate is being closed it will stop and reopen Operating the tailgate manually The power tailgate can be disconnected from the vehicle s electrical system by quickly pull ing the outer handle twice The tailgate can then be opened closed manually Folding down the rear seat backrests The rear seat backrests can be folded down for additional loading space see page 88 06 During your trip WARNING e Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sud den stops e
15. a j DA f 3 d A i i a Ta re BN Information Provided by gt 9 01 Safety 01 6 Re SS ee Volvo s concern for safety Safety is Volvo s cornerstone Our concern dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled off the production line Three point seat belts a Volvo invention safety cages and energy absorbing impact zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation We will not compromise our commitment to safety We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehi cles You can help We would appreciate hear ing your suggestions about improving automo bile safety We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle Call us in the U S at 1 800 458 1552 or in Canada at 1 800 663 8255 Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn t depend on how old you are but rather on e How well you see e Your ability to concentrate e How quickly you make decisions under stress to avoid an accident The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic envi ronment Never drink and drive If you are taking any medication consult your physician about its potential effects on your driving abilities Take a driver retraining course Have your eyes checked regularly Keep your windshield and headlights clean Replace wi
16. 08 Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level If necessary add distilled water The level should never be above the indicator The fluid level should be checked if the battery has been recharged After inspection be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in place Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running or when the key is in the ignition This could damage the vehicle s electrical system The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery To help keep the battery in good condition the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging function If the battery is fully discharged a number of times this may shorten its service life Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and cli mate Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery s starting capacity Because the battery s starting capacity decreases with time it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances CAUTION Always use distilled or deionized water battery water
17. 1 Press the end piece on one side of the cargo area cover into the retaining bracket in the side panel of the cargo area 2 Do the same on the opposite side 3 Press both sides of the cover until they click into place E The red mark will no longer be visible 4 Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place Removing the cover 1 Press one of the end pieces of the cover inward 2 Pull the cover carefully upward and out ward The other end will release automati cally from its retaining bracket Folding down the cargo area cover s rear flap The cargo area cover s rear flap points hori zontally when the cover is retracted rolled up To fold it down Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup ports and fold it down e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 kk 215 06 During your trip Cargo area On models equipped with this cover it should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors a Best E bi gt p ra 06 Cargo net mounted in rear position Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment The net can be attached in two different places e Rear position behind the rear seat back rest e Front position behind the front seat back rests 276 Option accessory for more infor
18. City Safety monitors traffic ahead of you using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec tion of the windshield If a collision is imminent City Safety will automatically apply the brakes which may feel like hard braking If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than approxi mately 9 mph 15 km h City Safety alone cannot prevent a collision from taking place The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid a collision or reduce its effect When the function activates and applies the brakes a message will appear in the informa tion display to indicate that the system is has been active e When City Safety applies the brakes the brake lights will illuminate In cases where City Safety has stop ped the vehicle the system will then release the brakes The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill Using City Safety The City Safety function is activated auto matically each time the engine has been switched off and restarted On and Off In certain situations it may be desirable to switch City Safety off such as when driving 2 The illustration is schematic details will vary depending on the model in close quarters where leaves branches etc may obscure the hood and windshield When the engine is running City Safety can be switched off as follows Press My Car in the center console control panel and go to Setti
19. The glove compartment lighting switches on off automatically when the lid is opened closed 2 Factory setting Overhead courtesy lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically when button 3 is in the neutral position The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if e the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control e the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode O The lighting switches off when e the engine is started e the vehicle is locked from the outside The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open The passenger compartment lighting can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked the courtesy lighting will switch off automatically after one minute Cargo area lighting The cargo area lighting comes on automatically when the tailgate is opened 96 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Home safe lighting When you leave your vehicle at night you can make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle 1 Remove the key from the ignition slot 2 Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible towards the steering wheel and release it 3 Exit the vehicle and lock the doors The headlights parking lights turn sign
20. VOLVO XC60 OWNERS MANUAL Web Edition Information Provided by a AN Welcome to the world wide family of Volvo owners We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this or any other vehicle And of course please do not operate a Volvo for life vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol medication or any impair ment that could hinder your ability to drive Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards If you have any questions regarding your vehicle please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section Contacting Volvo in this manual s Introduction chapter for information on get ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada Gi Contents gt Ds De 00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm important A ai eanne 8 Occ pant satety me a meee eee 16 Remote key and key blade 56 EUREN 12 Reporting safety defects ccccceseeees 17 ele 63 Important Walt e 13 A e E E 18 ele E 66 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 21 E un EE 69 Occupant Weight Sensor cccceeeeees 26 Side impact protection SIPS airbags 30 IMarable Cut 1
21. WE RE 32 Whiplash Protection System WHIPS 33 Rollover Protection System ROPS 35 ei node 98 S WO 36 filet et A E 37 Child restraint evstems EEN 40 Moni cats S A ES 42 Con cmple seats A 44 BOSE nenshions A 46 ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors 47 MOP Tete le ele EE 48 Integrated booster CuShiON sse00 49 Child safety lOCKS EE 52 a eee P A CH P O 03 Your driving environment Instruments and Kei eege EH 74 MON wee EE 82 GE 84 Steering A ee ere veeeeers 90 Lo AA AA 92 Wipers and washers uk 98 omer WINCOMGm 0009 101 ee 9 WE 3 103 compass sae 105 Laminated panoramic roof 106 HomeLink Wireless Control System 109 Sang the dite OPE 112 rr missionis 116 ce A A 119 ii cake A 122 Hill Descent Control HDC 125 04 Comfort and driving pleasure MS 130 Menus and Messag8S ccccccocccnononncnnononnos 131 The MY CAR En E 133 Ellen Et EE 139 MABRSO mputer CE 147 Slam lity evslem WEE f 149 Active chassis system Four UC 151 Cse CONPAIA MW 152 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 154 Bitance i se ee 164 CERCA AAA 167 Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Betection EEE f 172 Driver Alert System ccc
22. kk 251 05 Infotainment 05 252 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE RSE pop up menu Press d i onthe remote control while a video file is playing to display the pop up menu Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote to make menu selections See page 254 for detailed information about the remote control Screen aspect ration Image settings Day Night mode Source menu DVD disc menu RSE rear screen menus Press K onthe remote control when a source e g Disc has been selected to access the RSE menus for the rear screens Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote to make menu selections See page 254 for detailed information about the remote control RADIO 5 Applies only when a video file is playing The content of the menu will vary according to what is being played for example Disc menu or USB menu 7 Applies to DVD videos only The menus for AM FM1 FM2 Sirius1 and Sirius2 are Day Night mode Display off Reset all RSE settings MEDIA RSE CD Audio menu Disc menu Random Day Night mode Display off Reset all CD settings RSE CD DVD Data menu Disc menu Random Repeat folder DivX VOD code Day Night mode Display off i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Reset all CD DVD settings RSE DVD Video menu Disc menu DVD disc menu Subtitles Audio tracks Advanced settings Day Night mode Display off Reset all DVD settings
23. sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pres sure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
24. Bluetooth hands free connection e Mute mute the infotainment system s microphone e Mobile phone transfer the call from hands free to the cell phone On certain cell phones the connection will be broken which is normal The hands free function will ask if you would like to reconnect e Dial number dial a third party during an ongoing call using the number keys the current call will be put on hold Call lists Call lists are copied to the hands free function each time a cell phone is connected and the lists are updated while the phone is connected In normal view turn TUNE counter clockwise to see the All calls list In phone mode the various call lists can be displayed in Phone menu gt Call lists All calls Missed calls Answered calls Dialed calls certain cell phones show this list in reverse order e Call duration If no number has been stored this menu can be accessed by pressing and holding 1 1 Not supported by all cell phones Voice mail In normal view a speed dial number for voice mail can be programmed and accessed by pressing and holding 1 The number for voice mail can be changed in phone mode in Phone menu Call options gt Voicemail number Change number Sound settings Call volume Call volume can be only be adjusted during a call Use the buttons in the steering wheel key pad or the infotainment system s VOL control Infotainment system volume If no phone call is
25. MENU 2 Be sure the external device s Bluetooth function is turned on and that the device is discoverable See the devices user s guide if necessary Press OK MENU Turn TUNE to Change Bluetooth device and confirm by pressing OK MENU gt After a short time the external device s name will appear in the display If other devices that have been paired are in range their names will also be dis played 5 Select the device to be connected by turn ing TUNE and pressing OK MENU to con firm gt The external device will be connected to the infotainment system Audio files can now be selected using the buttons in the center console or on the steering wheel keypad Removing a paired device 1 In Bluetooth mode press OK MENU 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment Bluetooth media 2 Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth Bluetooth version information device and press OK MENU This feature offers information about the 3 Select the device to be removed by turning Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle s TUNE and confirm by pressing OK infotainment system This information can be MENU found under Bluetooth menu gt Bluetooth gt A question asking if you would like to software version in car remove the device will be displayed 4 Press OK MENU to confirm or EXIT to cancel Disconnecting an external device The external device is automatically discon nected from the audio system i
26. The information is shown with text and symbols gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 kk Ke D 03 Your driving environment 03 76 Instruments and controls More detailed information can be found in the descriptions of the functions that use the infor mation displays Gauges G044559 Gauges in the instrument panel Speedometer 2 Fuel gauge Please note that the fuel level indicator in the gauge moves from right to left as the amount of fuel in the tank decreases The arrow indicates the side of the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on See also the section on refueling beginning on page 266 See page 147 for more infor mation on fuel level and consumption The tachometer shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm Do not drive continuously with the needle in the red area of the gauge The engine management system will automatically prevent excessively high engines speeds This will be noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in engine speed Indicator information and warning symbols G044560 PEEP Indicator and warning symbols GD High beam and turn signal indicators 2 Indicator and warning symbols Information symbols O Indicator and warning symbols Function check All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode ll or when the engine is started i n R o Option accessory for more information see Int
27. Ut Cl ng EE 320 Repla MARUI Sat ct Den EE 322 Wiper DIME Sano EIN get Urs EE 329 A ere en EE ee ee ON a nnn Zr eee 331 FUSES voce RE ete tae Dien Der enee 334 Vehicle Care Be ein De Mies eegenen neger eet ge 342 Information Provided by us 63 o AL r MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS at ES A x aA Information Provided by y EA 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Volvo maintenance Introduction Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance program outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet This mainte nance program contains inspections and serv ices necessary for the proper function of your vehicle The maintenance services contain several checks that require special tools and training and therefore must be performed by a qualified technician To keep your Volvo in top condition specify time tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories The Federal Clean Air Act U S The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper servicing and function of the components that control emissions These services which are listed in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet are not covered by the warranty You will be required to pay for labor and material used Maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you in accordance w
28. ble for the child s age and size See the con l vertible seat manufacturer s recommenda 2 Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat l ions according to the manufacturer s instruc Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information Hone SAS Dopey a alan era on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors and or top tether 1 Place the convertible seat in the rear seat anchorages of the vehicle Convertible seats can be used in either a for ward or rearward facing position depending on the age and size of the child 4A 01 Safety Convertible seats 01 time and is normal The seat belt should now be locked in place Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 3 Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch e plate into the buckle lock until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt click Is audible 6 Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a 4 Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt the seat belt path to ensure that it is held l front passenger airbag not even if the out as far as possible to activate the belt s securely in place by the seat belt Passenger airbag off symbol near the automatic locking function rear view mirror is illuminated If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate this could lead to serious injury or It should not
29. command list Phone commands and General commands See page 133 for more information on the menu system Dialing a number The system understands the digits zero to nine These numbers can be spoken individually in groups of several digits at a time or the entire number can be given at once Numbers above nine will not be recognized The following is an example of a voice com mand dialogue The system s response may vary depending on the situation The user initiates the dialogue by saying Phone gt dial number or Phone dial number System response Number please User action Begin saying the digits in the phone number If you say several digits and pause the system will repeat them and prompt you by saying Continue Continue saying the digits When you have fin ished complete the command by saying Dial e You can also change the number by using the commands Correction which dele tes the last group of digits spoken or Delete which will erase the entire phone number Dialing from a call list The dialogue below enables you make a call from one of your cell phone s call lists The user initiates the dialogue by saying Phone gt dial from call list or Phone dial from call list Continue by responding to the system s prompts Calling a contact The dialogue below enables you to call the pre defined contacts in your cell phone See the phone s user s guide if necessary The user initi
30. etc is selected a short press on FAV will start the stored function A favorite function can also be programmed using the MY CAR menu system See page 134 for more information INFO displaying additional information LR e ADIO MEDIA A es A A 1 m ich Au G045301 In certain cases more information may be available about a radio station song artist etc than is currently displayed on the screen Press the INFO button to display all of the available information Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 infotainment General infotainment functions kk 211 CS 05 Infotainment 05 212 General infotainment functions Basic sound settings Press SOUND to display the basic sound set ting menu Bass Treble etc Continue press ing SOUND or OK MENU to display the other setting alternatives Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the new setting by pressing OK MENU Continue pressing SOUND or OK MENU to display e Surround Can be set to On or Off When switched on the system will automatically select settings for the best sound quality which is normally DPLII and Put will appear in the display If the recording was made using Dolby Digital technology play back will be provided with this setting and DO DIGITAL will appear in the display If Sur round is switched off audio will be provi ded using 3 channel stereo e Bass B
31. from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 07 Wheels and tires kk 07 TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does not replace normal tire maintenance For information on correct tire pressure please refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer Erasing warning messages When a low tire pressure warning message has been displayed and the tire pressure warning light has come on ie Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of all four tires Re inflate the tire s to the correct pressure consult the tire pressure placard or the inflation pressure table on page 291 In certain cases it may be necessary to drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph 80 km h or faster This will erase the warning text and the warning light will go out WARNING Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle Changing wheels with TPMS Please note the following when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels tires on the vehicle Only the factory mounted wheels are equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare tire this tire does not hav
32. or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery e Clothing that is not colorfast such as new jeans or suede garments may stain the upholstery Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild deter 1 see page 350 for the location of the model plate gent For best protection in winter Volvo rec ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats Consult your Volvo retailer Spots on interior plastic metal or wood surfaces Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose Consult your Volvo retailer Touching up paintwork VOLVO CAR CORPORATION o E o Y E o Paint code on the model plate Paint damage requires immediate attention to avoid rusting Make it a habit to check the finish regularly for instance washing the vehicle Touch up if necessary Paint repairs require special equipment and skill Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten sive damage Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch up paint Color code Make sure you have the right color The color code number is stated on the model plate Minor stone chips and scratches Material e Primer can e Paint touch up
33. pad and above the glove compartment and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash The driver s side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub The passenger s side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove com partment e The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be aSUPPLEMENT to not a replace ment for the three point seat belts For maximum protection wear seat belts at all times Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident e Never drive with your hands on the steering wheel pad airbag housing e The front airbags are designed to help prevent serious injury Deployment occurs very quickly and with consider able force During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position one may experience abrasions bruises swellings or other injuries as a result from deployment of one or both of the airbags e When installing any accessory equip ment make sure that the front airbag system is not damaged Any interfer ence in the system could cause mal function Front airbag deployment e The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front angular col lisions impacts or decelerations depend ing on the crash severity angle speed and object impacted The airbags may also deploy in certain non frontal collisions where rapid deceleration occurs e T
34. tion There is a slight delay in the PAC system which means that the view from behind the vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has been moved from the R position or until the vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph 10 km h The screen will then revert to the mode that it was in before R was selected and will for example display navigation system information If any button on the center console control panel is pressed the camera image will dis appear from the display Pressing CAM will return the camera image to the display Guiding lines G041224 The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground behind the vehicle and are affected by the way in which the steer ing wheel is turned This enables the driver to see path the vehicle will take even if he she turns the steering wheel while backing up When backing up with a trailer the guiding lines show the path that the vehicle will take not the trailer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 181 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Rear Park Assist Camera PAC Keep in mind that the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle The driver must always watch for people ani mals other vehicles etc near the sides of the vehicle when turning while backing up Marker lines 04 G04122
35. used OD CAUTION e Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub ber components e Polishing chromed strips can wear away or damage the surface e Polishes containing abrasive sub stances should not be used Automatic car wash e We do NOT recommend washing your car in an automatic wash during the first few months because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently e An automatic wash is a simple and quick way to clean your car but it is worth remembering that it may not be as thor ough as when you yourself go over the car with sponge and water Keeping the under body clean is most important especially in the winter Some automatic washers do not have facilities for washing the under body CAUTION e Before driving into an automatic car wash turn off the optional rain sensor to avoid damaging the windshield wipers e Make sure that side view mirrors auxil iary lamps etc are secure and that any antenna s are retracted or removed Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them e Chromed wheels Clean chrome plated wheels using the same deter gents used for the body of the vehicle Aggressive wheel cleaning agents can permanently stain chrome plated wheels e When the vehicle is driven immediately after being washed apply the brakes including the parking brake several times in order to remove any moisture from the brake linings e Engine cleaning agents should not be used when the
36. 05 Bluetooth hands free connection Bluetooth functions in the center console control panel uu 2 ABC 3 DEF i j ae sou 6 MNO ii HI S tzer E ge A E HN 7 Pors 8 muv auer i 1 Character keys containing letters and numbers for dialing numbers adding phone book entries etc TEL Press this button to activate deacti vate the Bluetooth function TUNE Turn to navigate among the menu alternatives in the display O OK MENU Press to answer an incoming call confirm your selection or access the phone menus Incoming calls can also be answered by pressing the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad 5 EXIT Press to end or reject calls erase characters that have been entered end an ongoing function This function is also available on the steering wheel keypad Getting started Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad and in the center console to access navigate and make selections in the hands free sys tem s menus Activating deactivating A short press on the TEL button in the center console activates the hands free system The Fa symbol in the display indicates that the hands free system is active A long press on the TEL button deactivates the hands free system and disconnects the cell phone Connecting cell phones The procedure for connecting a cell phone var ies depending on the phone itself and on whether or not the phone has been previously paired with the infotainment
37. 2 When you leave your vehicle lock it using the remote control The position of the driver s seat and door mir rors is now stored in the remote control s mem ory Automatic seat mirror adjustment To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi tion in which you left them 1 Unlock the driver s door with the same remote control the one used to lock the doors 2 Open the driver s door within 2 minutes The driver s seat and door mirrors will auto matically move to the position in which you left them e The key memory is independent of the seat memory The seat will move to this position even if someone else has moved it to a dif ferent seating position and locked the vehicle with a different remote control This feature will work in the same way with all of the remote control transmit ters that you use with your vehicle The function can be activated deactivated under MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Car key memory gt Position of door mirrors and driver s seat in key See page 133 for a description of the menu sys tem 1 See page 64 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move press one of the buttons to stop the seat WARNING Because the driver s seat can be adjusted with the ignition off children should never be left unattended in the
38. 200 Motor oil CHECKING DEE 318 SpecificatiONS incisiones 356 Verin E 357 PAYG A eet 133 Net in Cargo are 276 leren 16 Occupant weight Sensor 26 27 Octane recommendations 267 Odometer EEN iegzeet Srkergiieer Aas gege ee 80 Oil A 318 SPECI CATCNS icci occuientnaientincivacsrcrtcamtioes 356 o a PP Ie 357 On Call Roadside Assistance 362 Overhead courtesy lighting 95 96 Overheating engine 79 Oxygen sensors beated 270 p Paint touching WD ME 345 Park aeeist 186 188 Park Assist Camera sessin 190 Parking brake electric applying releasing 122 Want e Le EE 78 Parking GS EE 94 Personal Car Communicator unique func ONT GE 59 POIS e P EEE T 343 Power front seat memory EIEIEHE usina coosa ones 85 with keyless drive 86 POWER MMOP iinis nnne 103 ee 104 Power steering O A A SEE N 321 Speed dependent AA 151 Power steering fluid coccoonimmomomm o 397 ee Ee EE 271 POWET WINKOWS ee Age 101 laminated dass 102 Pregnancy using seat belts during 20 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 114 333 358 Radio Sirius satellite racdho 218 Radio TUNCUON EN 214 AD digital e He DE 216 Rain SONS rs 98 READ DUO Gl eet 131 Rear fog Un EE 94 326 Rear park aseist 186 188 Rear seat entertamment uk 245 Rear seat entertainment option beadpohones 246 o 251 remote Control 254 Rear seat headrestramte 87 Rear seats c
39. 22 36 kg e Stage 2 33 55 lbs 15 25 kg and whose height is between e Stage 1 45 55 in 115 140 cm e Stage 2 37 47 in 95 120 cm In Canada Transport Canada s weight recommendation is 40 80 Ibs 18 36 kg The booster cushions are designed to raise the child higher so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child s collarbone not over the child s neck If using a booster cushion does not result in proper positioning of the shoulder strap then the child should be placed in a properly secured child restraint See page 40 The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child s back or under the arm G043980 A j Correct seating position child s head is below the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone 1 Canada only This cushion may be referred to as a built in booster cushion Integrated booster cushion G043981 Incorrect seating position the child s head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is not across the collarbone Before driving check that e The integrated two stage booster cushion is set in the correct position for according to the child s height and weight see the table below and is locked in position Weight 48 80 lbs 33 55 Ibs 22 36 kg 15 25 kg Height 45 55 in 37 47 in 115 140cm 95 120 cm F i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 Safety 9 01 kk 49
40. 5 mm headphone socket and the infotain ment system s speakers Please be aware that external devices con nected through the A V AUX socket may cause interference in the RSE system Connecting a device to the A V AUX socket H The A V AUX socket is located under the center armrest in the tunnel console 1 Connect the device s video cable to the yellow connector 2 Connect the left audio cable to the white connector and the right audio cable to the red one 3 Ifthe device is designed to use 12 volt cur rent connect its power cable to the 12 volt socket see page 200 for the location of this socket Always follow the device s instructions when connecting it to the RSE system F i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment 05 kk 247 CS 05 Infotainment 05 248 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE Audio video playback through the A V AUX socket 1 Switch on one of the rear screens by press ing its On Off button 2 Use the remote control s Leen button to select a screen L left rear screen F front screen or R right rear screen Point the remote control toward the selected screen s IR transceiver and press the MEDIA button several times to come to A V AUX Release the button and wait several seconds to confirm your choice 3 Switch on the connected device and press PLAY or the device s equivalent button Input volume Adjust the input
41. Active Bending Lights due to the high Loun l voltage used by these headlights these E mea PS uae bulbs should only be replaced by a e Active Bending Lights trained and qualified Volvo service tech e LED bulbs nician See page 328 for a list of bulb specifications e Turn off the lights and remove the remote key from the ignition before Changing any bulbs For information regarding any other bulbs not mentioned in this section please con tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician i Option accessory for more information see Introduction The entire headlight housing must be lifted out when replacing all front bulbs CAUTION Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin gers Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector which will damage it e Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb The optional Active Bending Light bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo serv ice technician Removing the headlight housing 1 Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing the START STOP ENGINE button 2 Remove the remote key from the ignition slot 3 Upper illustration under Headlight hous ing E Withdraw the headlight housing s lock ing pins PD Pull the headlight housing straight out CAUTION When dis
42. Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con trol and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph 30 km h Time interval information is only given for a vehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc tion No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you moving very slowly or at a standstill Amber warning light An amber warning light in the windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead than the set time interval Distance Alert only monitors distance to the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or off Distance Alert only indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead It does not affect the speed of your vehicle Operation o o Ee Y o O Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on 1 The illustration is schematic certain details may vary from model to model i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Depending on the optional equipment selected there may not be room for a Distance Alert button in the center console In this case the function is controlled through the menu system Press MY CAR and go to Settings gt Car settings gt Distance alert gt On Off Setting a time int
43. FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated July 26th 2001 The laser beam s physical data is listed in the following table Maximum pulse energy 2 64 uJ Maximum average output 45 mW Pulse length 33 ns Divergence horizontal x verti 28 x 12 Cal The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety s laser sen The laser sensor emits light when the igni tion is in mode Il or higher even if City Safety has been switched off It is essential that all pertinent instruc tions be followed when handling laser instruments Testing repairing remov ing adjusting and or replacing any components in the laser sensor may only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Do not remove the laser sensor includ ing removal of the lenses A laser sen sor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to standard IEC 60825 1 Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes The laser sensor s connector must be disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield The laser sensor must be mounted in place on the windshield before con necting the sensor s connector Do not view the laser sensor which emits spreading invisible laser beams with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches 100 mm 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co City Safety Symbols a
44. If a contact has been saved in the infotain ment system the P_ 9 symbol will be dis played next to it Changes made from the infotainment sys tem to a contact in the cell phone s phone book will result in a new contact being added to the infotainment system s phone book However this contact will not be saved in the cell phone s phone book The infotainment system s display will show duplicate contacts with different icons Please also note that if a speed dial number is saved or if a contact s information is edi ted this will result in a new contact in the infotainment system s phone book The IPN symbol must be displayed before the phone book can be used and the hands free function must be in phone mode The infotainment system saves a copy of each paired cell phone s phone book This phone book can be copied each time the phone is connected Activate deactivate this function in phone mode in Phone menu Phone settings gt Download phone book If the phone book contains information about someone who is trying to call you this infor mation will be shown in the display 05 Infotainment Bluetooth hands free connection kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 Bluetooth hands free connection Contact shortcuts A quick way of searching the phone book for contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clock wise to access the phone book and then coun ter clockwise to select a contact from the list Press
45. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS the use of the sealing compound may lead to incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare cases damage to the tire pressure sensor Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire s inflation pressure Safely stow the tire sealing system ina convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire s inflation pres sure The empty bottle of sealing compound cannot be removed from the bottle holder Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the bottle removed and properly disposed of 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System 07 kk 07 Wheels and tires 07 Tire Sealing System If heavy vibrations unsteady steering behavior or noises should occur while driv ing reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place Recheck the tire for bumps cracks or other visible damage and recheck its inflation pressure If the pressure is below 19 psi 1 3 bar do not continue driving Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Stage 2 Checking inflation pressure 1 Connect the tire sealing system as descri bed in stage 1 2 Refer to the inflation pressure table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure If the tire needs to be inflated start the tire sealing system s compressor If neces sary release air from the tire by turning the air release kn
46. OK MENU to call Each name in the phone book has a default phone number If the symbol is displayed to the right of it this indicates that there are addi tional phone numbers for this contact To use a phone number other than the default one press the info button on the center console control panel Turn TUNE to select a different phone number and press OK MENU to call It is also possible to search for a contact by using the center console keypad to enter the first letter s ofthe contact s name see also the following table Buttons in the center console for each button s function The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the center console keypad with the first let ter of the contact s name For example press ing and holding button 6 would provide direct access to the section of the list with contacts whose names begin with M Buttons in the center console ka Space 1 ABCAAAZAG2 2 ABC 3 pee DEFEES acy GHI 4 5 JKL YKES 6 mo MNOOONOG e Tuy TUVUUS8 9 WXYZ x FAV Shift between upper and lower Case INFO 7 Searching for contacts iEn contact CAII Anders Andersson Ben Benjaminsson Carl Carlsson G044051 Searching for contacts using the text wheel List of characters Switch between character entry modes see the following table Phone book list of contacts To search for or edit a contact in phone mode go t
47. Rear park assist volume Phone ringing volume Reset system options This feature returns the System options menu to the original factory settings MY CAR gt Settings gt Voice settings A Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System and or a Bluetooth connected cell phone Voice tutorial Select this menu alternative and press OK for spoken information about how the system works Voice command list Phone commands Phone Phone call contact Phone dial number Navigation commands Navigation Navigation repeat instruction Navigation go to address General commands Help Cancel Voice tutorial The menu alternatives under Phone commands show examples of the voice com mands available when a cell phone is con nected to the Bluetooth hands free system See page 241 for more detailed information The menu alternatives under Navigation commands show examples of the voice com mands available for the optional Volvo Navigation System Refer to the navigation system s manual for detailed information Voice user setting Default setting User 1 User 2 Two user profiles can be set which is useful if more than one person uses voice commands regularly Default setting resets the factory settings Voice training User 1 User 2 Voice training enables the system to become familiar with the driver s voice and pronuncia tion A list of phrases is presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud W
48. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu 3 Press OK MENU and turn TUNE to scroll to the Lock options menu and press OK MENU 4 Use the number keys in the central control panel to enter the channel access code and press OK MENU 5 Press OK MENU to enter the Channel lock list 6 Press OK MENU to select All categories or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and press OK MENU to select it 7 Press OK MENU to select Lock all channels in the category or turn TUNE to scroll to a channel and press OK MENU to select it Multiple channels can be selected The selected channel is now locked and a checked box will be displayed to indicate this It will be necessary to enter the channel access code in order to listen to a locked channel Unlocking a channel A channel s access code is required to unlock a channel Unlock all channels This permanently removes all channels from the locked list and makes them available for selection Temporarily unlock all channels This function will temporarily unlock all chan nels and make them available for selection The channels remain on the locked list and will again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on CHANGE CODE This function makes it possible to change the channel access code The default code is 0000 To change the code 05 Infotainment 05 kk 05 Infotainment 05 1 Select Change code in theLock options menu and press OK MENU En
49. Volvo approved snow chains If accessory aftermarket or custom tires and wheels are installed and are of a size different than the original tires and wheels chains in some cases CANNOT be used Sufficient clearances between chains and brakes suspension and body components must be maintained Some strap on type chains will interfere with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used All Wheel Drive models Snow chains should only be installed on the front wheels Certain size tires may not allow the assem bly of snow chains traction devices 07 Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information 1 Where permitted CAUTION Check local regulations regarding the use of snow chains before installing Use single sided snow chains only Always follow the chain manufacturer s installation instructions carefully Install chains as tightly as possible and retighten periodically Never exceed the chain manufacturer s specified maximum speed limit Under no circumstances should you exceed 31 mph 50 km h Avoid bumps holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains The handling of the vehicle can be adversely affected when driving with chains Avoid fast or sharp turns as well as locked wheel braking Snow tires studded tires Tires for winter use Owners who live in or regularly commute through areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit
50. When turning KS Move the lever as far up or down as possi ble to start the turn signals The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel or the lever can be returned to its initial position by hand e This automatic flashing sequence can be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction e lf the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal check for a burned out turn signal bulb Interior lighting front o Y al QA o O Light switches front roof lighting ob Drivers side front reading light on off Passenger s side front reading light on off EN Overhead courtesy lighting The lighting in the front part of the passenger compartment is controlled with the buttons 1 and 2 in the roof console Switch 3 has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting e Off right side depressed automatic light ing Off e Neutral position automatic lighting is on e On left side depressed passenger com partment lighting on kk 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting E OI 03 Your driving environment Lighting Interior lighting rear 03 Rear reading lights The lights are switched on or off by pressing each respective button Courtesy lights door step lighting The courtesy lights door step lighting switch on off automatically when one of the front doors is opened closed Glove compartment lighting
51. a car or truck WARNING e BLIS does not react to cyclists or mopeds e BLIS does not react to vehicles that are standing still e The BLIS cameras have the same limi tation as the human eye In other words their vision is impaired by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall intense light directly into the camera dense fog etc Limitations In certain situations the BLIS indicator light s may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa sionally even when there are no other vehi cles in the blind area this does not indicate a fault in the system In the event of a fault Blind spot syst Service required will be displayed The following are several examples of situa tions in which the BLIS indicator light s may illuminate even when there are no other vehi cles in the area monitored by the system e OY jee Light reflected from a wet road surface gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 185 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 196 Blind Spot Information System The vehicle s own shadow against a large light smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on a highway G021432 Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low on the horizon Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to functi
52. and the alarm can be armed The buttons on the keyless drive remote If the PCC does not function normally weak key can also be used to lock and unlock battery etc the vehicle can be unlocked the vehicle see page 58 for more infor with the detachable key blade see mation page 61 Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the have the keyless function and additional ones key blade can be ordered The system can accommo z date up to six PCCs The red rings in the illustration indicate the area Range of the keyless drive remote key 5 ft around the vehicle that is within range of the 1 5 meters keyless drive antennas This system makes it possible to unlock and Unlocking the vehicle lock the vehicle without having to press any e A keyless drive remote key must be on the buttons on the Personal Car Communicators same side of the vehicle as the door to be PCC It is only necessary to have a keyless opened and be within 5 feet 1 5 meters drive remote key in your possession to operate of the door s lock or the tailgate see the E the central locking system shaded areas in the illustration e Pulla door handle to unlock and open the PETET OUE EVADIR CVET door or pull the tailgate opening control The driver s door on vehicles equipped with The number of doors that are unlocked at the keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with same timecan beset inihe vehicle s ment the remote key s detachable key bl
53. audio and video files are suppor ted by the system when playing a device con nected to the USB socket Audio formats mp3 wma aac m4a Video formats divx avi asf 05 CS 05 Infotainment 05 Bluetooth media Streaming audio Introduction The vehicle s media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone or personal digital assistant PDA Navigation and control of the device can be done through the vehicle s center console control panel or the steering wheel keypad On certain external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device In order to listen streaming audio the vehicle s media player must first be put in Bluetooth mode To do so Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed Release the but ton and wait several seconds or press OK MENU Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus from the center console control panel or the steering wheel keypad See page 256 for addi tional information about navigating the various menus Any Bluetooth media players used must support Audio Video Remote Control Pro file AVRCP and Advanced Audio Distribu tion Profile A2DP The player must use AVRCP version 1 3 and A2DP 1 2 If older versions of these standards are used cer tain features e g scan or random may not function Not all cell phones or media players are fully compatible with the vehicle s Bl
54. backrest is not locked in the e On hot days the temperature in the upright position vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure of people to these high tem peratures for even a short period of time can cause heat related injury or death It may be necessary to move the front seats Small children are particularly at risk forward or put their backrests in a more upright position before folding down the rear seat backrests D 03 Your driving environment Steering wheel G021138 Adjusting the steering wheel Lever for releasing locking the steering wheel Possible positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach 1 Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you 3 Push back the lever to lock the steering wheel in place If the lever is difficult to push into place press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever Never adjust the steering wheel while driv ing With the optional speed dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted see page 151 Unlocking 1 Insert the remote key into the ignition slot as far as possible 2 Press the START STOP ENGINE button gt A sound will be audible when the lock releases Vehicles with keyless drive A remote key must be in the passenger com partment or cargo compartment but not inserted into the igni
55. be possible to move the child death to a child seated in this position The locking retractor will automatically restraint child seat more than 1 in 2 5 cm release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path allowed to retract fully The convertible seat can be removed by 5 Press the convertible seat firmly in place unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut A completely sound from the seat belt retractor s auto matic locking function will be audible at this A i S 01 Safety 01 Securing a booster cushion G022851 J Positioning the seat belt Position the child correctly on the booster cushion 4 Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Booster cushions are recommended for chil fits snugly around the child dren who have outgrown convertible seats 1 Place the booster cushion in the rear seat WARNING of the vehicle e The hip section of the three point seat belt must fit snugly across the child s 2 With the child properly seated on the hips not across the stomach booster cushion attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man ufacturer s instructions e The shoulder section of the three point seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder 3 Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch e The shoulder belt must never be placed plate into the buckle lock until a distinct b
56. belt Read the message on the infor mation display Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal The park Manual release ing brake will release when the vehicle 1 Fasten the seat belt begins to move 2 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot or Heavy load uphill press the START STOP ENGINE button A heavy load such as a trailer can cause the Parking brake control Messages on vehicles with the optional keyless drive vehicle to roll backward when the parking o VC y a brake is released automatically on a steep Weenie 3 Press firmly on the brake pedal incline To help avoid this Service Required MN 4 Pul tne parking brake control 1 Keep the electric parking brake lever Automatic release pushed in with the left hand while shifting 1 Start the engine into Drive with the right 2 While pressing the throttle pedal to pull away release the parking brake lever only after the vehicle begins to move Park brake not fully released A fault is pre venting the parking brake from being released Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times If the problem persists contact kk D 03 Your driving environment Parking brake an authorized Volvo workshop If you drive off with this error message showing a warning signal sounds Parking brake not applied A fault is pre venting the parking brake from being applied Try to apply the parking brake and re
57. blind area CAUTION The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech nician WARNING e BLIS is an information system NOT a warning or safety system e BLIS does not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes e Asthedriver you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner The system is based on digital camera tech nology The cameras are located beneath the side view mirrors When one or both of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area up to approximately 10 ft 8 meters from the side of your vehicle and up to approximately 31 ft 9 5 meters behind the side view mirror see the illustration the indicator light in the door panel illuminates The light will glow continu ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area Option accessory for more information see Introduction The door panel indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time both lights will illuminate BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the driver if a fault should occur with the system For example if one or both of the system s cameras are obscured a message see the table on page 196 will ap
58. cccccsececeeeecseseeeaees 290 speed FALUMGSwvvcceessiccwssisencssceesteavenenwess 290 o 287 ele WEE 298 tire pressure monitoring system 309 tread wear mdcator 288 uniform tire quality grading 297 Top tether anchors child restraint sys E E 48 TOUCHING Up Dali eccirni 345 TOWING a Trailer 278 279 tailer TTC isocdercostaraintaacrncniessanestensonas 279 Towing the vebucle ube 281 282 Traction GONE De EE 149 Traller TOWING EN 278 279 GESEIS 279 Transmission general descrtption 116 117 Eliette 357 shiftlock OVENS i ixcetsanssnecvaneienstaxsanies 117 Tread wear mdcator 288 Tip COMPUSI siise anniina 147 THO Bee ein 80 Trips long distance 264 TUM Sia EE 95 changing DUIDS e coasainassasmsnrans 325 Indicators T7 Two stage booster cusbon 49 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 297 Unlocking the tailgate ccomomm m o 67 Unlocking the vehicle 58 66 Upholstery CaN ciccnctecettsocsstancsetetecbadevenes 344 V vanity MITO aereas eebe 200 eelere le 327 Vehicle dmensions 352 Vehicle Event Data 11 Vehicle Joadimg uk 271 295 A 274 Vehicle Maintenance cccccecececeeeeeees 314 performed by the ower 315 Vehicle WIGS E 353 Voice control Cell PONES uni nda 241 Volvo and the environment 12 Volvo maintenance 314 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 362 Volvo DIOS E 362 Volvo Gensus 130 W Warning flasher
59. center posi tion the license plate lighting comes on at the same time The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle The rear fog light is considerably brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog rain snow smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft 150 meters The single rear fog light is located in the driver s side taillight cluster The rear fog light will only function in combination with the high low beam headlights Press the button to switch the rear fog light on off gt The rear fog light indicator symbol on the instrument panel and the light in the button come on when the rear fog light is switched on The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard G045010 Location of the hazard warning flasher button To activate the flashers press the button in the center dash Press the button again to turn off the flashers a a e Regulations regarding the use of the hazard warning flasher may vary depending on where you live e The hazard warning flashers will be acti vated automatically if an airbag deploys Turn signals When changing lanes ED The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up or down to the first position and releasing it
60. containing methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys tem Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 06 DIU your trip Refueling Octane rating Minimum octane MINIMUM OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD 3 Typical pump octane label G028920 Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per formance but using 87 octane or above will not affect engine reliability Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated horsepower torque and fuel economy per formance using premium 91 octane fuel Demanding driving In demanding driving conditions such as oper ating the vehicle in hot weather towing a trailer or driving for extended periods at higher alti tudes than normal it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel 91 or higher or to 1 AKI ANTI KNOCK INDEX is an average of the Research Octane Number RON and the Motor Octane Number MON MON RON 2 change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine s capacity and for the smoothest pos sible operation When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands it may be neces sary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable Fuel Formulations Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor and do not use lead additives Besides damaging the exhaust e
61. dashboard air vents and windows Airflow to windows from dashboard air vents and to the floor To ensure comfortable conditions and good de fogging in cold or humid weather In sunny weather with cool outside tempera tures To warm or cool the feet To cool the feet or pro vide warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot dry weather Trip computer Introduction 600 mi ime moni es AP 232 F Information display and controls READ press to acknowledge confirm erase a message 2 Thumb wheel used to scroll among the trip computer menus RESET resets certain functions To scroll through trip computer information move the thumb wheel up or down Continue turning to return to the starting point Functions If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function Acknowledge a message by pressing READ To change the unit of measure specified for distance and speed contact an authorized Volvo workshop Average speed The system calculates the average speed from the last resetting Reset using RESET Current speed in mph Canadian models only This function provides the driver with an instan taneous conversion of the car s current speed from km h to mph Current speed in km h U S models only This function provides the driver with an instan taneous con
62. doors are unlocked the locks will auto matically reengage re lock and the alarm will re arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail gate has been opened Audible visual alarm signal e An audible alarm signal is given by a bat tery powered siren The alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds e The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off Remote key not functioning If the remote key is not functioning properly the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows 1 Open the driver s door with the key blade see page 61 for information on detaching the key blade gt This will trigger the alarm Ed o Ei 10 Es 2 0 2 Insert the remote key into the ignition slot also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive This will turn off the alarm 3 Start the engine Reduced alarm function Turning off the accessory alarm sensors In certain situations it may be desirable to turn off the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors if for example you drive your vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in the vehicle with the doors locked The vehicle s menu system is used for turning off these sensors see page 133 for a descrip tion of the menu system 1 Go into the menu under Car settings 2 Select Reduced Guard Press OK MENU to choose 3
63. e e ule ly A C compressor engine 10 valves engine control mod ule E EVAP valve heated oxygen 15 sensor 5 Fuel leakage detection 5 AE Cooling fan 80 Electro hydraulic power 100 steering 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and specifications Under the glove compartment alElellelslals 1L IL le HINI GIBIH 1 1 0909 SOU 0088 SHES 80899 4998 O Loi a a keng G044518 Fee E Controls in front passeng 20 d D 12 13 Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Pos Function Ia boxes 1 Press the cover s lock and fold it up sd er s door 2 The fuses are accessible Controls in right rear pas 20 Positions fuse box A senger s door ap Circuit breaker for the info 40 tainment system and for fuses 16 20 Ed e Controls in left rear pas 20 senger s door 12 volt socket cargo area 15 Keyless drive 20 08 Controls in driver s door 20 E ei e 90 6 Power driver s seat 20 Sis Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and specifications 14 Power front passenger s Adaptive cruise control seat collision warning l S Heated front passenger s 15 15 Folding rear seat head 15 seat 6 Courtesy lighting rain sen 7 5 restraints sor Py Heated driver s seat 15 d Infotainment control mod 5 Steering wheel module 7 5 ule Park assist trailer hitch 5 i S control module park 8 Cental l
64. fluid Filling 1 Turn and open the cover 2 Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks Power steering fluid Ei o Ed ei Check the level frequently The fluid does not require changing The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks For capaci ties and recommended fluid grade see page 357 If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no elec trical current and must be towed it is still possible to steer the vehicle However keep in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel OD CAUTION Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 322 Replacing bulbs Introduction All bulb specifications are listed on page 328 The following bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni W cian e If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous e The engine should not be running when changing bulbs e Dome lighting reading lights ing please keep in mind that compo e Glove compartment lighting nents in the engine compartment will be e Footwell lighting hot e Turn signals in the door mirrors e Approach lighting in the door mirrors WARNING e Brake lights rear fog light taillights e
65. for use in city traffic WARNING e DAC is not intended to extend the dura tion of driving Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert e In certain cases fatigue may not affect the driver s behavior In situations of this type no warning will be provided Therefore it is important to take breaks at regular intervals regardless of whether or not DAC has given a warn ing Limitations In certain situations DAC may provide warn ings even if the driver s driving pattern has not become erratic e if the driver is testing the LDW function e in strong crosswinds e on grooved road surfaces Operating DAC Certain settings can be made from the menu system controlled from the center instrument panel The current system status can be checked on the trip Computers display by using the but tons on the left steering wheel lever Thumb wheel Turn this wheel until Driver Alert is displayed The second line shows the alternatives Off Driver Alert Standby lt 40 mph Driver Alert Standby lt 65 km h Unavailable or i e the number of bars READ button Confirms and erases a mes sage in the display Activating DAC Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel and go to Car settings gt Driver Alert and select On See page 133 for more information on the menu system The function is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph 65 km h The display will sh
66. h Lane Depart Warn Available will be dis played If the vehicle s speed falls below 37 mph 60 km h LDW will return to standby mode and Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 40 mph 65 km h will be displayed If the camera can no longer monitor the road s side marker lines Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane s left or right side marker lines the driver will be alerted by an audible signal No warning signal will be given in the follow ing situations e The turn signal is being used e The driver s foot is on the brake pedal e The throttle pedal is pressed quickly e If the steering wheel is moved quickly e n sharp turns that cause the vehicle s body to sway See page 176 for information on the camera s limitations The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 183 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 184 Driver Alert System Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system by pressing My Car Go to Settings gt Car settings Driver support systems gt Lane Departure Warning Symbols and messages in the display departure warning OFF gt Lane Depart Warn Available Lane D
67. has been driven erratically The driver receives an audible signal and a text message The camera is temporarily not functioning due to snow ice or dirt on the windshield Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera See page 176 for information on the camera s limitations The system is not functioning Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display 182 Option accessory for more information see Introduction This function is designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane LDW con sists of a camera that monitors the lane s side marker lines The driver is alerted by an audible signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road s center dividing line 1 When Increased sensitivity has been selected a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console A light in the but ton illuminates when the function is on The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 40 mph Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 65 km h when the function is in standby mode When LDW is in standby mode the function is activated automatically after the camera has monitored the road s side marker lines and the vehicle s speed exceeds 40 mph 65 km
68. heated oxygen sensor in 1976 The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful substances CO HC NOx from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 99 and the search to eliminate the remaining emis sions continues Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240 Advanced elec tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal In addition to continuous environmental refinement of con ventional gasoline powered internal combus tion engines Volvo is actively looking at advanced technology alternative fuel vehicles When you drive a Volvo you become our part ner in the work to lessen the car s impact on the environment To reduce your vehicle s environmental impact you can e Maintain proper air pressure in your tires Tests have shown decreased fuel econ omy with improperly inflated tires e Follow the recommended maintenance schedule in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet e Drive ata constant speed whenever pos sible e See a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible for inspec tion if the check engine malfunction indi cator light illuminates or stays on after the vehicle has started e Properly dispose of any vehicle related waste such as used motor oil used batter ies brake pads etc e When clea
69. information 04 Reset car settings This feature returns the Car settings menu to the original factory settings MY CAR gt Settings Driver support systems Collision Warning Collision Warning Warning distance Long Normal Short Warning sound See page 174 for more information Lane Departure Warning Lane Departure Warning On at start up Increased sensitivity See page 183 for more information DSTC See page 149 for more information City Safety See page 167 for more information BLIS See page 194 for more information Distance Alert See page 164 for more information Driver Alert See page 180 for more information MY CAR gt Settings gt System options Set change time See page 80 for more information Time format 12h 24h Screensaver The contents of the screen are replaced by another image if this selection is marked The contents of the screen will be displayed again if one of the buttons 1 4 is pressed see page 133 Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver off Language Select the language for menu texts Show help text This displays help texts for the current menu Distance and fuel units MPG Uk MPG US km l I 100km See page 147 for more information about the trip Computer Temperature unit Celsius Fahrenheit Select the temperature scale to be displayed by the climate control unit The MY CAR menus Volume levels Voice output volume Front park assist volume
70. information on using this button nform tinn Views in the display General information The infotainment system displays information in four different views The highest most gen eral level is called the main view and is com mon to all system modes RADIO MEDIA TEL Each mode has three different basic views e Normal view the default view for that par ticular mode e Quick scroll view the view displayed when TUNE is turned which allows you to e g change tracks on a CD change radio sta tions etc e Menu view a view for navigating and mak ing selections in the mode s menu system The views in the different modes vary depend ing on the mode selected the vehicle s equip ment current settings etc 05 Infotainment Getting started 05 kk 05 Infotainment Getting started el 100 5 ute Megapol 05 New contact Speed dial Receive vCard Memory status Clear phone book Example of Bluetooth hands free mode s menu view Main view the display 2 for example FM1 and press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice Press and hold EXIT to go back NAV Navigation system RADIO Radio MEDIA Media DISC USB etc G044043 le E EE Example of RADIO mode s main view Modes e g RADIO MEDIA etc see the following table Source menu e g FM1 DISC etc Press and hold EXIT on the steering wheel keypad to display the main view see the i
71. km h J 118 mph 190 km h H 130 mph 210 km h V 149 mph 240 km h Speed ratings W 168 mph 270 km h Y 186 mph 300 km h Load ratings See page 292 for an explanation of the load rating on the sidewall of the tire 07 Wheels and tires Inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle Refer to the tire inflation placard see page 289 for its location for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Front Rear psi kPa psi kPa 235 65 R17 35 240 35 240 235 60 R18 235 55R19 255 45 R20 Temporary spare tire 61 420 61 420 Please consult a Volvo retailer s Parts department for the most up to date speci fications 07 07 Wheels and tires Tire designations Information on the sidewall G010753 Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires see the illustration The following information is listed on the tire sidewall The tire designation Please be aware that the following tire des ignation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle 07 215 the width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge The larger the number the wider the tire 65 The ratio of the tire s height to its width in percent R Radi
72. list of stations is displayed 214 Option accessory for more information see Introduction press info on the number key pad on the cen ter console to switch to manual tuning which enables you to select a frequency from the complete list of all radio frequencies available on the currently selected waveband In other words in manual tuning mode turning TUNE one step will change from e g 93 3 to 93 5 etc To manually tune a station 1 Press RADIO Continue pressing this but ton to toggle to the desired waveband AM FM1 etc and wait for several sec onds or press OK MENU to confirm 2 Turn TUNE to select a frequency The radio is initially set to automatically search for stations in the area in which you are driving see the preceding section List of stations However if you have switched to manual tuning by pressing NFo on the number key pad on the center console while the list of stations is displayed the radio will remain in manual tuning mode the next time it is switched on To switch back to list of sta tions mode turn TUNE one step to display the full list of stations and press INFO Please note that if you press Ingo when the list of stations is not displayed this will acti vate the INFO function See page 211 for more information about this function Storing preset stations Ten preset stations can be stored for each waveband AM FM1 etc Stored preset stations
73. may be partially concealed This eyelet must be screwed into the positions provi ded on the right sides of either the front or rear bumper see illustration A There are two different types of covers over the openings for the towing eyelet and they have to be opened differently e fthe cover has a notch insert a coin etc into the notch and pry open the edge of the cover Open the cover com pletely and remove it e If the cover has a mark along one edge or in a corner press the mark while pry ing out the opposite side corner using a coin etc Open the cover and remove it Screw the towing eyelet in place first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place After the vehicle has been towed the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location Press the cover for the attachment point back into position On certain models equipped with a trailer hitch the towing eyelet cannot be screwed into the hole in the rear bumper The towing rope should be attached to the trailer hitch instead For this reason the detachable section of the trailer hitch should be safely stowed in the vehicle at all times OD CAUTION If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed e Remember that the power brakes and power steering will not function when engine is not running The braking and steering systems wil
74. message will also appear in the main instru ments panel s display The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button see page 131 The warning symbol can also come on in conjunction with other sym bols Action 1 Stop ina safe place Do not drive the vehi cle further 2 Read the information on the information display Implement the action in accord ance with the message in the display Clear the message using READ kk 03 Your driving environment GE 03 y D 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors the hood or tailgate is not closed properly the information or warning symbol comes on together with an explanatory text message in the instrument panel Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and 03 close the door hood or tailgate If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower than approximately 5 mph 7 km h the information symbol comes on If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph 7 km h the warning symbol comes on o el Y y o 0 Trip odometers and reset button Odometer display Button for toggling between T1 and T2 and for resetting the odometer The trip odometers are used to measure short distances A short press the button toggles between the two trip odometers T1 and T2 A long press more than 2 sec
75. of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely Distraction can lead to a serious accident In addition to this general warning we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may be found in your vehicle e Never use a hand held cellular telephone while driving Some jurisdictions prohibit cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving e f your vehicle is equipped with a naviga tion system set and make changes to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked e Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving Program radio pre sets with the vehicle parked and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler e Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle is mov ing Accessory installation e We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine Volvo approved accessories and that accessory installa tions be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician e Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ensure compatibility with the performance safety and emission systems in your vehi cle Additionally a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo In all cases please consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv ice technician before installing any acces sory in or on your vehicl
76. on the vehicle The follow ing conditions will trigger the alarm e The hood is forced open The tailgate is forced open A door is forced open The ignition slot is tampered with An attempt is made to start the vehicle with a non approved key a key not coded to the car s ignition e fthere is movement in the passenger com partment if the vehicle is equipped with the accessory movement sensor e The vehicle is lifted or towed if the vehicle is equipped with the accessory inclination sensor e The battery is disconnected while the alarm is armed e The siren is disconnected when the alarm is disarmed A message will appear in the information dis play if a fault should occur in the alarm system Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Do not attempt to repair any of the compo nents in the alarm system yourself This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle The alarm indicator light The status of the alarm system is indicated by the red indicator light on the dashboard see illustration e Indicator light off the alarm is not armed e The indicator light flashes at one second intervals the alarm is armed e The indicator light flashes rapidly before the remote key is inserted in the ignition slot and the ignition is put in mode I the alarm has been triggered nformation Provided D Arming the alarm Press the Lock button on the remote key One l
77. out Reinstall the cover in the reverse order Low beam Halogen 1 Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle See page 322 2 Remove the cover over the bulbs see page 323 2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only High b Unplug the connector from the bulb Remove the bulb by pressing the holder downward Press the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place It can only be secured in one position Put the cover back into position and rein stall the headlight housing eam Halogen Ei te N A ise ei G Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle see page 322 Remove the cover over the bulbs see page 323 Remove the bulb by turning it counter clockwise and pulling it straight out Remove the connector from the bulb Press the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise to put it in place It can only be secured in one position Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing Put the cover back into position and rein stall the headlight housing Extra high beam A S at e Ze eil bel to N be ei e 0 Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle see page 322 2 Remove the cover over the bulbs see page 323 3 Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb holder 4 Remove the bulb holder from the headlight housing by pulling it straight out 5 Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps in place It c
78. provide confirmation when a button has been pressed try moving closer and pressing the button again Outside of the PCC s range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft 100 m from the vehicle when the information button is pressed no new information will be received The PCC most recently used to lock or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle s most recently received status The indicator lights will not flash when the information button is pressed while the PCC is out of range If more than one PCC is used to lock unlock the vehicle only the one used most recently will show the correct locking status Remote key and key blade If none of the indicator lights illuminate when the information button is pressed this may be because the most recent transmission between the vehicle and the PCC was inter rupted or impeded by buildings or other objects Keyless drive Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal Car Communicator have the keyless drive function see page 63 for detailed informa tion Detachable key blade The key blade can be removed from the remote key When removed the key blade can be used to e Lock unlock the driver s door if the remote key is not functioning properly e Lock unlock the glove compartment see page 67 e Block access to the glove compartment Removing the key blade N Es o A o O DR Slide the spring loaded catch to the side ES Pull the key blade
79. related acces 2 First connect the red jumper cable to the sories contain lead and lead compounds auxiliary battery s positive terminal 1 chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm 3 Fold back the cover over the positive Wash hands after handling terminal on your vehicle s battery 2 marked with a sign located under a folding cover 1 CAUTION 4 Connect the black jumper cable to the aux Connect the jumper cables carefully to iliary battery s negative terminal 3 and avoid short circuits with other components to the ground point in your vehicle s engine in the engine compartment compartment right engine mount at the top on the outer screw 4 5 Start the engine in the assisting vehicle then start the engine in the vehicle with dead battery 6 After the engine has started first remove the negative terminal jumper cable black Then remove the positive termi nal jumper cable red 03 Your driving environment EN Starting the engine WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts Avoid touching hot manifolds Batteries generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin fabrics or painted surfaces If con tact occurs flush the affected area immediately with water Obtain medical help immedia
80. s IR transceiver and press RADIO one or more times to come to the desired source AM FM1 Sirius1 etc release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted 3 Select a station using one of the preset buttons 0 9 on the remote control or press 44 gt to search for the next previous available station See page 214 for more information about the radio RSE menus Introduction Settings in the RSE menus can be made from the front center console control panel or by using the remote control in the rear seat A source for one of the rear screens can be acti vated from the front center control panel and certain settings for the rear screens can also be made from this panel RSE front screen menus To access this menu begin by selecting RSE under MEDIA by pressing this button on the front center console or by using the remote control or the steering wheel keypad Continue by pressing OK MENU to access the menu Turn TUNE to the desired selection and con firm by pressing OK MENU Settings can be made for the left or right rear screen separately or for both screens Left RSE screen menu Right RSE screen menu and Both RSE screen menus Power off Power on RADIO MEDIA RSE settings Mute Display off Disable remote control front Reset all RSE settings F i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE 05
81. seconds Without releasing the Home Link button proceed with Programming step 1 2 The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada IC RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion The transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN HomeLink Wireless Control System 03 111 D 03 Your driving environment 03 112 Starting the engine Start G045198 Ignition switch with remote key inserted see page 82 for more information on ignition modes WARNING Before starting the engine Fasten the seat belt Check that the seat steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly Make sure the brake pedal can be depressed completely Adjust the seat if necessary WARNING e Never use more than one
82. speeds can be chosen for video files Press the gt gt Il aa buttons sev eral times to increase the speed Release the button to return to normal viewing speed Gracenote track identification If the vehicle is equipped with the optional nav igation system this system uses a hard drive containing a database that recognizes music on audio CDs The database contains songs that are currently popular If the media player finds a track in the database the album title and artist s name are displayed and the title artist and album for each song is also dis played If the current audio CD is not found in the database CD text from the disc is used If no CD text is available only track 1 track 2 etc will be displayed Scan This function plays the first ten seconds of each track audio file To start scanning 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Scan gt The first ten seconds of each track audio file will be played 3 Stop scanning by pressing EXIT The cur rent track audio file will continue playing Random This function plays the tracks in random order shuffle The random tracks sound files can be scrolled through in the normal way To listen to tracks in random order 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Random Media player 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the random play function Press the buttons on the center con sole or steering wheel keypad to change tracks audio files Repeat fol
83. system windshield wipers audio sys tem etc and make sure that all doors are closed 3 Using a pen or similar object press and hold the button on the underside of mirror until C is shown again in the mirror after approx 6 seconds 4 Drive as usual C disappears from the dis play when calibration is complete Alternative calibration method Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 5 mph 8 km h until C disap pears from the display when calibration is complete Compass Selecting a magnetic zone G018632 Magnetic zones The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones The correct zone must be selected for the com pass to work correctly 1 Put the ignition in mode ll 2 Using a pen or similar object press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for at least 3 seconds The number for the current area will be shown 3 Press the button repeatedly until the num ber for the required geographic area 1 15 is shown 4 The display will revert to showing the com pass direction after several seconds e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ae 03 105 D 03 Your driving environment 03 106 Laminated panoramic roof Introduction The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two sections e The rear glass section is fixed in place and cannot be moved e The front glass section can be slid hori zontally to
84. the open or closed positions or its rear edge can be raised and lowered to allow ventilation All references in this section to opening or clos ing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass section The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun shade made of perforated fabric that is located below the sections of glass This shade can be opened or closed for example when driving in bright sunlight G035684 Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade are operated by the controls in the ceil ing console near the rear view mirror The vehicle s ignition must be in mode I or II before the laminated panoramic roof sun shade can be operated CAUTION e Remove ice and snow before opening the laminated panoramic roof e Do not operate the laminated panor amic roof if it is frozen closed e Never place heavy objects on the lami nated panoramic roof E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Operation h i G031428 ED Auto open arrow points toward the rear of the vehicle ER Manual open ED Manual close EIS Auto close Laminated panoramic roof WARNING e During manual closing if the laminated panoramic roof is obstructed immedi ately open it again e Never open or close the laminated pan oramic roof if it is obstructed in any way e Never allow a child to operate the lami nated panoramic roof e Never leave a child alone in a vehicle e Never extend an
85. the optional Volvo Navigation System only G043875 Voice control button on the steering wheel Activating the system Before any phone voice commands can be used a Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with the infotainment system If a phone command is given the system will inform you If there is no cell phone paired See page 234 for information on pairing a cell phone Press the voice control button 1 in the illustra tion to activate the system and initiate a com mand dialogue The system will display com monly used commands on the screen when the button has been pressed 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 Cell phone voice control While using the voice control system keep the following points in mind e When giving commands speak at your usual speed and in a normal tone of voice after the tone e The vehicle s doors windows and moon roof should be closed when using the voice control system e Avoid background noises in the cabin when using the system If you are uncertain of the commands that you Can use saying help will prompt the system to provide a number of commands that can be used in a specific situation Voice control commands can be cancelled by Saying cancel Not speaking Pressing and holding the voice control button Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but tons RADIO MEDIA etc Voice control support features e Tutorial A feature th
86. this reason always activate the audible warning signal Slippery driving conditions increase braking distance which can reduce the system s 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection capacity to avoid a collision In these condi WARNING tions the ABS and DSTC systems provide the best possible braking effect while helping to e n certain situations the system cannot If warnings are given too frequently the maintain stability provide warnings or warnings may be warning distance can be reduced see delayed if traffic conditions or other page 174 This causes the system to pro external factors make it impossible for vide later warnings which decreases the the radar sensor or camera to detect a total number of warnings provided The visual warning signal may be temporar pedestrian or a vehicle ahead ily disengaged in the event of high passen e Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING ger compartment temperature due to strong DEE to fie GE is short or if movements of the steering wheel y e P T F k t h i i 04 EE fore it will not brake your vehicle if you ti Ving Se approach a vehicle ahead at very low speed such as when parking sunlight etc If this occurs the audible warning signal will be used even if it has been deactivated in the menu system e The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and provides warnings and braking
87. this tire is based on braking straight ahead traction tests and is not a measure of cornering turning traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking straight ahead traction tests and is not a measure of cornering turning traction TEMPERATURE The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all pas senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed eral Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause heat buildup and tire failure 07 Wheels and tires 07 07 Wheels and tires Snow chains snow tires studded tires Winter driving conditions Snow chains Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the following restrictions Snow chains should be installed on front wheels only Use only
88. used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance inter vals except at owner request and at addi tional charge Please consult your Volvo retailer 08 Information Provided by 08 Maintenance and specifications G031918 Location of the coolant reservoir Normally the coolant does not need to be changed If the system must be drained con sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech nician See page 357 for information on cooling sys tem capacities 08 CAUTION If necessary top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant Antifreeze only a 50 50 mix of water and anti freeze Different types of antifreeze coolant may not be mixed If the cooling system is drained it should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water anti freeze The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level and the level must be between the MIN and MAX marks If it is not kept filled there can be high local temperatures in the engine which could result in damage Check coolant regularly Do not top up with water only This reduces the rust protective and anti freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicle s cooling system e Never remove the expansion tank cap while the engine is w
89. vehicle Movement ofthe seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel Do not adjust the seat while driving The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully In addition position the seat as far rear ward as comfort and control allow The seat rails on the floor must not be obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion Heated seats See page 143 03 Your driving environment EN Rear seats The center head restraint should be adjusted Manually folding down the rear seat s according to the passenger s height The outboard head restraints Rear center head restraint restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup port the occupant s head e Pull the head restraint up as required e To lower press and hold the button located at the center between the back Ge rest and the head restraint while pressing the head restrain down WARNING The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied When the center position is occupied the head restraint should be e Pull the handle closest to the head restraint correctly adjusted to the passenger s to fold it down height The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper e To deer Wado ee most point of the seat occupant s ear Bee Pass The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually The out
90. washed within a E EE 2 Normal continuous wiping e Parking lights on Optional Active Bend ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed Nor The rear wiper is equipped with cut off func mal halogen headlights will not be washed tion which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats The wiper will a O CAUTION function again after a cool down period 3 30 seconds or longer depending on the K Use ample washer fluid when washing the heat of the motor and ambient temperature Washing function windshield The windshield should be thor conditions oughly wet when the wipers are in opera Move the lever toward the steering wheel to tion start the windshield and headlight washers gt gt e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 99 D 03 Your driving environment 03 100 Wipers and washers Tailgate wiper and reverse gear If the windshield wipers are on and the trans mission is put into reverse gear the tailgate wiper will go into intermittent wiping function This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected On vehicles with the optional rain sensor the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected if the rain sensor is acti vated and it is raining If the tailgate wiper is in the normal continuous wiping mode selecting different gears will not affect its function IR reflecting windshield Se
91. wet 07 surfaces It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these fea tures on snow ice free surfaces Most models are equipped with all season tires which provide a somewhat higher degree of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires 1 Option or accessory on some models without the all season rating However for optimum road holding on icy or snow covered roads we recommend suitable winter tires on all four wheels When replacing tires be sure that the new tires are the same size designation type radial and preferably from the same manufacturer on all four wheels Otherwise there is a risk of altering the car s roadholding and handling characte ristics New Tires G043929 gt Wu Remember that tires are perishable goods of 2000 the manufacturing week and year Department of Transportation DOT stamp will be indicated with 4 digits e g 1510 means that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur ing week 15 of 2010 Tire age Tires degrade over time even when they are not being used It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service Heat caused by hot climates frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet U V exposure can accelerate the aging process The temporary spare should also be replaced at 6 year intervals even if it has never been used A tire s age can be determined by the DOT stamp on the sidewall s
92. your hand held transmitter until the HomeLink indica tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Proceed with Programming step 3 to com plete Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the pro grammed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficul ties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three Home Link buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed as outlined below follow the step noted 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 10 seconds 2 Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 20 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming step 1 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton DO NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20
93. 0 Temperature control passenger s side Defroster maximum effect Recirculation Blower di AUTO O Manual air distribution floor 13 A C on off Manual air distribution dashboard air vents GO Manual air distribution defroster 8 Heated rear window and door mirrors see page 104 if Option accessory for more information see Introduction Heated front seats AUTO CLIMATE The current seat temperature is shown in the cen ter console display Press the button once for the highest heat level three indi cator lights come on Press the button twice for a lower heat level two indica tor lights come on Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one indicator light comes on Press the button four times to switch off the heat no indicator lights come on Seat heating will automatically switch off when the engine is switched off Heated rear seats isd i Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front seats Blower control Turn the control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower speed If AUTO is selected blower speed will be regula ted automatically and this will override manual adjustment 1 Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions If the blower is turned off completely the air conditioning is disengaged w
94. 09 Specifications Doo 18 363 1 2 3 12 volt sockete cccceceeecececececececeaeaeaes 200 A ABS anti lock brake avstem 120 Accessory installation wammimg 13 Active chassis system 151 Active YAW Control 149 Adaptive brake lightS ccoooocccooommm 119 Adaptive cruise control 154 156 Airbags disconnecting the front passenger s A 26 27 QA 22 inflatable Curtam 32 SIDS MDAC GE 30 Air GOMGIIO isos sini ai 144 Air OISTADUMION acomodar 140 Air distribution Table 146 len AAPP ono o A A 141 All Wheel Dve 118 Anmtt JTreeze ccc eceeeeseeeeseeeeveueevees 264 320 Anti lock brake system WANING MOM aserrean enisinia 76 Anti lock Brake System ABS 120 Approach Iobtmg 58 96 Audio system AUX USB sockets E 227 Bluetooth devices 230 Bluetooth hands free system 233 Bluetooth streaming audio 230 general funchons EEN 211 getting SE wccsendssenscmcevenseavaucevensesns 206 AD digital e D 216 NEO GUC de EE 204 media Dlaver een 223 a E 256 e 204 radio hi ei ten E 214 Rear seat entertamment 245 Sirius Satellite radio 218 sound SCUING Sicovsisetonseinsarsoseiavionsoredenst 212 steering wheel kevpad 209 VOICE COM Oliinessendirscvseneaseaseacgucuntenisvecc 241 Auto dim rearview TmirrOr 104 Automatic locking reiractor 38 Automatic transmission Geartronic 116 117 general description
95. 1 The PAC system s lines Marker line for a 1 foot 30 centimeter zone behind the vehicle ch Marker line for the clear back up zone E Wheel tracks The solid line 1 indicates a zone within 1 ft 30 centimeters of the rear bumper The dashed line 2 indicates the clear zone of approximately 5 feet 1 5 m behind the bumper These lines also indicate the outmost limits that any object door mirrors corners of the body etc extends out from the vehicle even when the it turns The wheel tracks 3 between the side marker lines show where the wheels will roll and can extend up to approximately 10 5 ft 3 2 m behind the bumper if there are no objects in the way Vehicles equipped with Park Assist Colored fields 4 one per sensor indicate distance Ifthe vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Assist system the distance to an object will be indicated more exactly and colored markers in the display indicate which of the sensor s has detected the object 192 Option accessory for more information see Introduction The markers change color from yellow to orange to red as the vehicle comes closer to the object Marker color Distance to object Yellow more than 5 ft 1 5 m Orange 5 1 ft 0 3 1 5 m Red 0 1 ft 0 0 3 m Settings Press OK MENU when a normal camera view is displayed and make the desired settings Parking camera settings e Mark Park Assist lines to display the side li
96. 1 6 mm Tread wear indicator 07 The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread The letters TWI Ls nformation Provided by are printed on the side of the tire When approximately 1 16 1 6 mm is left on the tread these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced Tires with less than 1 16 1 6 mm tread offer very poor trac tion When replacing worn tires it is recommended that the tire be identical in type radial and size as the one being replaced Using a tire of the same make manufacturer will prevent altera tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle Tire inflation Tire inflation placard Tire inflation Check tire inflation pressure regularly See the tire inflation table on page 291 A tire inflation pressure placard is also located on the driver s side B pillar the structural member at the side of the vehicle at the rear of the driver s door opening This placard indicates the des ignation of the factory mounted tires on your vehicle as well as load limits and inflation pres sure The placards shown indicate inflation pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory only A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pres sure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature Always check tire pres sure regularly Use a tire gauge to check the tire infl
97. 15 minutes after the engine has been started Keep the section of the windshield in front of the camera clean and free of ice snow or condensation Option accessory for more information see Introduction The camera has the same limitations as the human eye In other words its vision is impaired by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall dense fog etc These conditions may reduce the function of systems that depend on the camera or cause these systems to temporarily stop function ing Never place any objects decals etc on the windshield in front of the camera This could reduce or block the camera s function and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the camera to stop functioning Strong sunlight reflections from the road surface ice or snow covering the road a dirty road surface or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera s capacity to detect the side of a lane a pedestrian or another vehi cle Pedestrians G043978 The system cannot identify all pedestrians The Collision Warning system can only identify and detect a pedestrian who is standing upright This person can be standing still walk ing or running This means that the system has to be able to identify a person s head arms shoulders legs the upper and lower parts of the body and a person s pattern of movement when walking or running If parts of the body are no
98. 198 Ignition slot with remote key and START STOP ENGINE button Inserting the remote key Holding the end of the remote key with the base of the key blade insert the remote key into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration and press it in as far as possible past the detent OD CAUTION Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or cause damage 1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive Removing the remote key The remote key can be removed from the igni tion slot by pulling it out Ignition modes Ignition mode 0 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and press it in as far as possible Ignition mode To access ignition modes I or Il without star ting the engine the brake pedal must not be depressed With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot press START STOP ENGINE briefly Ignition mode II With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot press START STOP ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds Returning to mode I from mode II With the remote key fully pressed into the igni tion slot press START STOP ENGINE briefly E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Returning to mode 0 from mode Open the driver s door Ignition mode functions The various ignition modes are accessed with the remote key in the ignition slot 0 Odometer clock and tempera ture gauge are illuminated The infota
99. 61 A From inside the vehicle central locking button Central locking button The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time Press to lock and to unlock Unlocking The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the vehicle in two ways e By pressing the unlock button Al e The door can be unlocked by pulling the door handle once and opened by pulling the handle again Locking e Press the lock button after the front doors have been closed e Each door can be locked individually with the lock button on the respective doors The door must be closed first Alternative locking when parking The central locking button on the driver s door can also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave it To do so 1 Open the door 2 Press the lock section of the button 3 Close the door This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment To help avoid this lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the remote key If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the door 02 Locks and alarm Automatic relocking The glove compartment can only be locked Unlocking the tailgate with the remote If the doors are unlocked the
100. 8 336 A Engine compartment upper Engine compartment front Engine compartment lower Positions These fuses are all located in the engine com partment box Fuses in dei are located under Q e Fuses 16 33 and 35 41 may be changed at any time when necessary e Fuses 1 15 34 and 42 44 are relays circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician e There is a special fuse removal tool on the underside of the cover O Circuit breaker 50 O Circuit breaker 50 6 Circuit breaker 60 ER Circuit breaker 60 MOMIAS Mo MOM SE MC Mo Mo ei E Mo Circuit breaker Headlight washers Windshield wipers Climate system blower ABS pump ABS valves Active Bending Lights headlight leveling Central electrical module ABS Speed dependent steering force 20 30 40 40 20 10 20 5 5 Ge OG GEO GG amp Engine Control Module ECM transmission SRS Heated washer nozzles Lighting panel Engine compartment box Auxiliary lights Horn Engine Control Module ECM Control module automatic transmission Compressor A C Relay coils 10 20 15 10 15 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and specifications Starter motor relay Ignition coils 20 Engine Control Module 10 Injection system mass air 15 meter engine control mod
101. AUTION Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and or its brackets 5 Pull the net strap taut Removing and storing the cargo net Press the release buttons on the locks on the straps and pull out a small section of the strap ES Press in the catches on the straps hooks and remove the hooks from the eyelet E Fold up the net s rod at the center and roll up the net When not in use the cargo net can be stored under floor of the cargo area 06 During your trip 06 06 06 During your trip Towing a trailer WARNING Introduction Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hitches that are specially designed for the vehi cle OKT See page 353 for the maximum trailer and tongue weights recommended by Volvo e Observe the legal requirements of the state province in which the vehicles are e All Volvo models are equipped with energy absorbing shock mounted bump ers Trailer hitch installation should not interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems but take into considera tion e Increase tire pressure to recommended full pressure See the tire inflation table on page 291 e When your vehicle is new avoid towing heavy trailers during the first 620 miles 1 000 km e Maximum speed when towing a trailer 50 mph 80 km h e Engine and transmission are subject to increased l
102. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps e Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden Load anchoring eyelets Grocery bag holder F stops e Switch off the engine apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the when loading and unloading the vehicle arog vehicle are used to fasten straps etc to help anchor items in the cargo area The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place 1 Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo area 06 2 Secure the shopping bags with the strap kk Option accessory for more information see Introduction 213 06 During your trip Roof loads e The vehicle s wind resistance and fuel con sumption will increase with the size of the Using load carriers load Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso e Drive smoothly Avoid rapid starts fast ries Observe the following points when in use cornering and hard braking e To avoid damaging your vehicle and to achieve maximum safety when driving we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle e Volvo approved removable roof racks are designed to carry the maximum allowable roof load for this vehicle 220 Ibs 100 kg For non Volvo roof racks check the man ufacturer s weight li
103. Black box Your vehicle s driving and safety systems employ computers that monitor and share with each other information about your vehi cle s operation One or more of these comput ers may store what they monitor either during normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near crash event Stored information may be read and used by e Volvo Car Corporation e service and repair facilities e law enforcement or government agencies O others who may assert a legal right to know or who obtain your consent to know such information A e Introduction 12 Introduction Volvo and the environment Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus tomers As a natural part of this commitment we care about the environment in which we all live Caring for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing our environ mental impact Volvo s environmental activities are based on a holistic view which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its complete life cycle In this context design production product use and recycling are all important considerations In production Volvo has partly or completely phased out several chemicals including CFCs lead chromates asbestos and cadmium and reduced the number of chemicals used in our plants 50 since 1991 Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into production a three way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond now called the
104. C consists of a number of func tions designed help reduce wheel spin coun teract skidding and to generally help improve directional stability OD CAUTION A pulsating sound will be audible when the system is actively operating and is normal Traction control TC This function is designed to help reduce wheel spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle on the same axle TC is most active at low speeds This is one of DSTC s permanent functions and cannot be switched off Active Yaw Control AYC This function helps maintain directional stabil ity for example when cornering by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally This is one of DSTC s permanent functions and cannot be switched off Spin control SC The spin control function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating Engine Drag Control EDC EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels show a tendency to lock e g when shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting mode or while using the engine s braking func tion on a slippery surface If the engine were to stop power steering would not function mak ing the vehicle more difficult to steer Trailer Stability Assist TSA Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicl
105. If this phone is not within range the hands free sys tem will attempt to connect one of the other paired cell phones When the infotainment sys tem searches for the most recently connected phone this phone s name appears in the dis play Manual connection To connect a phone other than the one that was most recently connected or to switch between cell phones that are already paired with the hands free system go to Phone menu Change phone Removing a paired phone from the list In phone mode a paired phone can be removed from the list of phones in Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device Bluetooth version For information about the Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle go to Phone menu gt Phone settings gt Bluetooth software version in car Phone book The hands free system uses two phone books one with the cell phone s list of contacts and one with contacts saved directly in the info tainment system which are combined to form one phone book e The infotainment system downloads the phone book from a connected cell phone This phone book will only be displayed when this cell phone is connected to the hands free system e The infotainment system also has an inte grated phone book made up of contacts that have been saved in the system regardless of which cell phone is currently connected when the contact is saved These contacts will be displayed regard less of the cell phone that is connected
106. Infotainment Media player The buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad can also be used to change audio video files The following symbols are used in the display e Jd audio files e amp video files o Y folders When a file has been played the player will continue to play the rest of the files of the same type in the current folder When all of the files in the folder have been played the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the 05 files in it unless Repeat folder is activated The system automatically detects and changes settings if a disc containing only audio or only video files is inserted in the player and will play these files However the system will not change settings if a disc containing both audio and video files is inserted and the player will continue to play the current type of file 2 Not video DVDs Video images will only be visible when the vehicle is not moving When the vehicle is traveling faster than approximately 4 mph 6 km h No visual media available while driving will be displayed Sound from the film will still De audible and video images will be shown again when the vehicle stops Some copy protected audio files or home burned audio files may not be read by the player DVD videos See page 225 for information Fast forward reverse Press and hold the buttons to fast forward reverse This is done at one speed for audio files but several
107. K MENU The selected source will begin playing automatically if there is a disc in the media player Cancel and return by pressing EXIT Settings can also be made with the remote control See page 254 for more detailed infor mation Muting Audio for the rear screens can be muted from the front center control panel This function can be activated under RSE settings gt Mute as explained in points 2 4 in the section Select ing a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel Switching off the rear screens Both of rear screens can be switched off from the front center control panel This function can be activated under RSE settings Display off as explained in points 2 4 in the sec tion Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel on page 248 Press one of the remote control s number keys 0 9 to switch the screens on again The screens will also be switched on when the igni tion is switched on Disabling the remote control front The IR transceiver for the front screen can be switched off which means that the remote control cannot be used on the front screen This function can be activated under RSE settings Disable remote control front as explained in points 2 4 in the section Select ing a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel on page 248 1 Applies only when watching video files 2 Applies only to video DVDs Rear s
108. NGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is on it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in an upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the per son s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the pas senger s frontal airbag e If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat This condition reflects limitations of the OWS Classification capability It does not indicate OWS malfunction Modifications If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability for example by altering or adapting the driver s or front passenger s seat s and or airbag sys tems please contact Volvo at 01 Safety 9 01 kk o gaa S 01 Safety 01 Occupant Weight Sensor In the USA Volvo Cars of North America LLC e Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P O Box 914 Rockleigh New Jersey 07647 1 800 458 1552 In Canada S Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon B
109. Navigate to a menu for example Settings using the thumb wheel 1 and press it to open a submenu Navigate to the desired submenu such as Car settings Navigate to Lock settings and press the thumb wheel to open a new submenu Navigate to Doors unlock and press the thumb wheel to open a submenu with alter natives that can be selected Use the thumb wheel to move to the desired choice and press the thumb wheel to put an X in the box Finish by exiting the menu system either one step at a time with short presses on EXIT 2 or press and hold this button to return to the main menu The OK MENU 2 EXIT 4 and control 3 in the center console can be used in the same way MY CAR When the MY CAR symbol has been selected the following menu alternatives are displayed AAN MY CAR MY XC60 Support systems E y Ka o re E o O e My XC60 e Support systems e Settings My XC60 E My XC60 DSTC e City Safety 3 Driver Alert 4 Collision Warning 5 Reduced Guard 6 Active Bending Lights w Deselect for sport mode Spin control off i MY CAR 3 My XC60 The display shows all of the vehicle s driver support systems which can be activated deactivated here Driver support systems A Support systems Collision Warning Univailable Lane Depart Warning Univailable Driver Alert Univailable o N LO Y O 0 MY CAR Support systems MY CAR gt Support sys
110. System TPMS 309 08 Maintenance and specifications reit golt later E 314 Maintaining your Eak a a 315 Hood and engine compartment Sl SIS Oil EF 318 GE A 320 Replacing tt D 90 322 Wiper blades and washer fluid 329 AA E A 331 lc AAA 334 Viel sa 342 Contents Oo 011 10 00 111 09 Specifications 10 Index El a aces eer 350 MAEKA a E ace ec areas Sarna 364 EIERE DEE 352 Overview of information and warning sym ele 359 Vole yitete tl eee ccoo 362 Introduction Important information About this manual Contacting Volvo In the USA Volvo Cars of North America LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P O Box 914 Rockleigh New Jersey 07647 1 800 458 1552 www volvocars us In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York Ontario M2H 2N7 1 800 663 8255 www volvocars ca e Before you operate your vehicle for the first time please familiarize yourself with the information found in the chapters Your Driving Environment and During Your Trip e Information contained in the balance of the manual is extremely useful and should be read after operating the vehicle for the first time e The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference For this reason it should be kept in the vehicle for ready access Footnotes Certain pages of this man
111. T to cancel To activate deactivate the song seek function 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and press OK MENU to activate or deactivate the function When the song has ended the radio will remain tuned to the channel on which the song was played Song memory Up to ten songs can be saved in the system s memory To add the currently playing song to the list 1 Press OK MENU 2 Scroll to Song memory and press OK MENU 3 Scroll to Add current song to song memory and press OK MENU If a new song is selected when the memory is full you will be prompted to delete a song from the list To do so 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of songs Select a song and press OK MENU to delete it from the list Radio text This text provides information about the song that is currently playing To turn this feature on or off press OK MENU and scroll to Show radio text and press OK MENU to toggle between on or off Advanced Sirius settings This menu function enables you to make set tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions To access this menu 1 Press OK MENU 2 Scroll to the Advanced settings menu and press OK MENU WARNING Settings should be made when the vehicle is at a standstill The following settings can be made in the Sir ius menu e Channel skip settings can be made e Channe
112. The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment Be sure the jack is on a firm level non slippery surface Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire For any other job use stands to support the vehicle Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park P position Block the wheels standing on the ground use rigid wooden blocks or large stones The jack should be kept well greased and clean and should not be damaged No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle Re installing the wheel Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub 2 Lift the wheel and place it on the hub Tighten the lug nuts 3 043932 e EM Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand tight Using the lug wrench tighten cross wise until all nuts are snug Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft Ibs 140 Nm Install the wheel cover where applicable The opening in the wheel cover for the tire s inflation valve must be positioned over the valve Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Introduction USA FCC ID KR5S122780002 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing conditions 1 This device may not cause harmfu
113. There fore vehicles or objects with low reflective sur faces may not be detected Normally the license plate and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec tive surfaces to be detected Keep the windshield in front of the laser sensor free of ice snow dirt etc See page 168 Snow or ice on the hood deeper than 2 inches 5 cm may obstruct the sen sor Keep the hood free of ice and snow Do not mount or in any way attach any thing on the windshield that could obstruct the laser sensor Troubleshooting If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in the information display this indicates that the City Safety laser sensor is obstructed in some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of you which means that the system is not func tioning However this message will not be displayed in all situations in which the sensor is obstructed For this reason the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the sensor is always kept clean The following table shows some of the situa tions that can cause the message to be dis played and suggested actions The area of the Clean the wind windshield in front of shield or remove the the sensor is dirty or ice snow covered by ice or snow The laser sensor s Remove the field of view is obstruction obstructed CAUTION If a crack scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front
114. Two alternatives are now available e Activate once If this alternative is selected Reduced guard See manual will appear in the instrument panel display and the accessory incli nation and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated when the vehicle is locked e Ask when exiting If this alternative is selected a message will appear in the center console display each time the engine is turned off Press OK MENU to accept and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated when the vehicle is locked Press EXIT to cancel 4 Press OK MENU and lock the vehicle The next time the engine is started the alarm system will be reset and Full guard will appear in the instrument panel display The accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be reactivated In either of the alternatives if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and move ment alarm sensors do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle 02 Locks and alarm 02 Tele Beie 82 A o A E ES 84 Steering wheel kk REENEN ENER ENEE ENER 90 Breed e EE 92 wc Wipers and WashelSaimrs a 98 Sn NO 101 Mirrors bo stent eene EE 103 Com Sp H ee EE 105 Laminated tee EE 106 HomeLink Wireless Control Gvstem nos 109 Starti A TIO ien EEN 112 Transmis A TC iada Eaei Eiaeia iaai 116 Brakes A A 119 Parkmg a n ee enge EE NA 122 9 Hill Descent Contro HDG nnn AA 125 3 72 Option access
115. Y CAR under Settings Car settings gt Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right mirror See page 133 for information about the MY CAR menu system Automatic retraction when locking When the vehicle is locked unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted extended The function can be activated deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking See page 133 for a description of the menu system Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be electrically reset to the neutral position for electric retracting extending to work e Retract the mirrors with the L and R but tons e Fold them out again with the L and R but tons The mirrors are now reset in neutral position Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors comes on when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected see page 96 Rear window and door mirror defrosters p z Bi d f a E el OI i Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors Press the button once to start simultaneous rear window and door mirror defrosting The light in the button indicates that the function is active Switch the function off when then win dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain The rear w
116. a Ee E o Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels Under normal driving condi tions most of the engine s power is directed to the front wheels However if there is any ten dency for the front wheels to spin an electron ically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction 4 Standard on certain models nfarmatinan Dravidad hi rom ion H l Brakes Brake system The brake system is a hydraulic system con sisting of two separate brake circuits If a prob lem should occur in one of these circuits it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit If the brake pedal must be depressed farther than normal and requires greater foot pressure the stopping distance will be longer A warning light in the instrument panel will light up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred If this light comes on while driving or braking stop immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir Press the brake pedal hard and maintain pressure on the pedal do not pump the brakes If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display DO NOT DRIVE Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected Brake pad inspection On v
117. abel information 09 List of labels ER Vehicle Identification Number 09 Specifications Model plate Vehicle Identification Number VIN Codes for color and upholstery etc The model plate is located on the rear side of the B pillar the pillar between the front and rear passenger doors and the rear pas senger s door must be open in order to see it Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS specifications USA and Min istry of Transport CMVSS standards Canada Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards as evi denced by the certification label on the driver s side B pillar the structural mem ber at the side of the vehicle at the rear of the driver s door opening For further infor mation regarding these regulations please consult your Volvo retailer O Tire inflation pressures This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory Cana dian models have the upper decal U S models have the lower one VIN The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard The Vehicle Identification Number VIN should always be quoted in all correspondence concern ing your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts 5 Vehicle Emission Control Information Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli cable emission standards as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood For furthe
118. ade if nec system Press MY CAR and go to Car settings essary see page 61 for information on remov ing the key blade from the remote key To access the keyhole in the driver s door gt gt e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 63 02 Locks and alarm 02 Keyless drive 1 Press the key blade approx 0 5 in 1 cm straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover gt The cover will come off due to the pres sure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward 2 Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver s door lock Turn the key blade to unlock the driver s door only This will trig ger the alarm Press the remote key into the ignition slot to turn off the alarm 3 Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked Locking the vehicle G042792 Models with keyless drive have a button on the outside door handles The doors and the tailgate can be locked by pressing the lock button in any of the outside door handles On keyless drive vehicles the gear selector must be in the Park P position all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the igni tion must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked Keyless drive remote key and driver s seat door mirror memory e When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in your possession and lock any door the position of the driver s seat and door mir rors will be stored in the seat s memor
119. ain types of child restraint AS AS systems infant seats convertible seats and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac booster cushions They are classified accord front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer s instructions for detailed information ing to the child s age and size front passenger airbag not even if the on securing the restraint Passenger airbag off symbol near the The following section provides general infor rear view mirror is illuminated on vehicles mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor If three point seat belt Refer to page 47 48 the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi tion for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors and or top tether anchorages 0 RE eS ee 01 Safety 9 Child restraint systems 01 WARNING When not in use keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help pre vent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision A small child s head represents a con siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak Volvo recom mends that children up to age 4 travel properly restrained facing rearward In addition Volvo recommends that chil dren should ride rearward facing prop erly
120. ained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support In the USA Volvo Cars of North America LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P O Box 914 Rockleigh New Jersey 07647 1 800 458 1552 www volvocars us In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York Ontario M2H 2N7 1 800 663 8255 www volvocars ca 01 Safety 9 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 01 S 01 Safety 01 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag decals WARNING e Children must never be allowed in the A W AR N l N G front passenger s seat e Occupants in the front passenger s seat EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS must never sit on the edge of the seat E Children can be killed or seriously injured by sit leaning toward the instrument panel the airbag Deployment of front airbags occurs only one time during an accident In a colli sion where deployment occurs the air bags and seat belt pretensioners acti vate Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released The release of the powder may appear as smoke like matter This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate fire E Always use seat belts and child restraints E See owner s manual for more information as comfort allows and be against the about air bags 0 j tow u Wa m The back seat is the safest place for children or otherwise sit out of position N faci hild in the fi 1 S Wa IAN SEENEN e Theoccu
121. ake and Pedestrian Detection Operation Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and using the menus displayed On and off To switch Collision Warning on or off press MY CAR on the center console control panel and go to Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning If Collision Warning is on the system will perform a self test each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning light See page 134 for more information about the menu sys tem When the engine is switched on the Collision Warning setting that was being used when it was switched off will be the default setting Activating deactivating warning signals The collision warning system s visual signals are activated automatically when the engine is started if the collision warning system is switched on The audible warning signal can be activated deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings gt Car settings Driver support systems gt Warning sound if risk of collision Setting a warning distance This setting determines the distance at which the visual and audible warnings are triggered Select Long Normal or Short by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning gt Warning distance The warning distance determines the level of sens
122. aker Road North York Ontario R M2H 2N7 1 800 663 8255 No objects that add to the total weight on the seat should be placed on the front passenger s seat If a child is seated in the front passenger s seat with any additional weight this extra weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision thereby injuring the child The seat belt should never be wrapped around an object on the front passeng er s seat This could interfere with the OWS system s function The front passenger s seat belt should never be used in a way that exerts more pressure on the passenger than normal This could increase the pressure exer ted on the weight sensor by a child and could result in the airbag being enabled which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision thereby injuring the child Keep the following points in mind with respect to the OWS system Failure to follow these instructions could adversely affect the system s function and result in serious injury to the occu pant of the front passenger s seat The full weight of the front seat passen ger should always be on the seat cush ion The passenger should never lift him herself off the seat cushion using the armrest in the door or the center console by pressing the feet on the floor by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cu
123. al tire 15 The diameter of the wheel rim in inches 95 The tire s load index In this example a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs 690 kg H The tire s speed rating or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time carry ing a permissible load for the vehicle and with correct inflation pressure For exam ple H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph 210 km h The tire s load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they are not required by law 10 M S or M S Mud and Snow AT All Terrain AS All Season U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufac tured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For exam ple 1510 means that the tire was manu factured during week 15 of 2010 The num bers in between are marketing codes used atthe manufacturer s discretion This infor mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall purposes Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies indi cates or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall whic
124. alA Toggle between upper and lower is activated in Phone menu gt Phone book case letters by pressing OK gt Receive vCard MENU Memory status lt gt Press OK MENU and the cursor In phone mode the memory status of the info z will move to the character entry tainment system s phone book and the con field 2 at the top of the display nected cell phone s phone book can be seen The cursor can now be moved by in Phone menu Phone book gt Memory turning TUNE to a position where status new characters can be entered or deleted by pressing EXIT In Clearing the phone book order to add characters return to In phone mode all entries in the infotainment text entry mode by pressing OK system s phone book can be cleared in Phone MENU menu Phone book Clear phone book 05 Speed dial Speed dial numbers can be added in phone mode in Phone menu gt Phone book gt Speed dial To use speed dial to make a call in phone mode press a button on the center console keypad followed by OK MENU If a contact has not been saved on the speed dial number used you will be prompted to save a contact on the number selected Clearing the entries in the infotainment sys tem s phone book does not delete entries in the cell phone s phone book Accept vCards vCards from other cell phones can be added to the infotainment system s phone book To ena ble this feature put the infotainment system in discoverable mode for Bluetooth
125. ally needed to allow test OBD II to reach readiness Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more infor How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission mation on planning a trip inspection e Maintain your vehicle in accordance with Your vehicle can fail OBD ll emission inspec your vehicle s maintenance schedule tion for any of the following reasons e If your Check Engine MIL light is lit your vehicle may fail inspection e If your vehicle s Check Engine light was lit but went out without any action on your part OBD II will still have a recorded fault Your vehicle may pass or fail depending on the inspection practices in your area e If you had recent service that required dis connecting the battery OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and not ready for inspection A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection How can prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection e f your Check Engine MIL light is lit or was lit but went out without service have your vehicle diagnosed and if necessary serviced by a qualified Volvo technician e f you recently had service for a lit Check Engine light or if you had service that 08 required disconnecting the battery a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to ready for inspection A half hour trip of mixed stop and go high 08 Maintenance and specifications Q Hood and engine compartment AN WARNIN Battery Check that the hoo
126. als lights in the door mirrors license plate lights and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 2 60 or 90 seconds The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Light settings gt Home safe light duration See page 133 for a description of the menu system Approach lighting Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key see the illustration on page 58 When the function has been activated the parking lights indicator lights door mirror lights license plate lighting dome lighting and door step lighting come on 03 Your driving environment ED Lighting The time interval for this lighting can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings gt Light settings gt Approach light duration See page 133 for a description of the menu system 03 Information Provided by A D 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washers 03 Windshield wipers and washers Rain sensor on off 2 Thumb wheel sensitivity frequency CAUTION e Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation e Before using the wipers ice and snow should be removed from the wind shield rear window Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place G044647 Windshield wipers off 0 Move the lever to position 0 to switch off the windshield wipers
127. als Please refer to ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 139 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Climate system your Warranty and Service Records Informa tion booklet or consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for these intervals The filter should be replaced more often when driving under dirty and dusty conditions The filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should always be replaced with a new one ORC There are different types of cabin air filters Ensure that the correct type is installed Interior Air Quality System IAQS A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles in the incoming air thereby reducing the levels of odors and contaminants entering the vehi cle The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recircu lated i e no outside air enters the vehicle The filter also cleans recirculated passenger com partment air OLE Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals Materials used in the cabin The materials used in the cabin have been developed to help minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin easier to keep clean All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning Use car cleaning products reco
128. an also happen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat Other occupants should also be properly restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the injury of a child All states and provinces have legislation gov erning how and where children should be car ried in a vehicle Find out the regulations exist ing in your state or province Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating posi tions when properly restrained A child restraint system can help protect a child in a vehicle Here s what to look for when selecting a child restraint system It should have a label certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS 213 or in Canada CMVSS 213 Make sure the child restraint system is approved for the child s height weight and development the label required by the stand ard or regulation or instructions for infant restraints typically provide this information In using any child restraint system we urge you to carefully look over the instructions that are provided with the restraint Be sure you under stand them and can use the device properly and safely in this vehicle A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle When a child has outgrown the child safety seat you should use the rear seat with the standard
129. an be found on page 350 A table listing important weight limits for your vehicle can be found on page 353 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehi cle s placard Gei Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 07 Wheels and tires 07 kk 07 07 Wheels and tires Vehicle loading WARNING Exceeding the permissible axle weight gross vehicle weight or any other weight rating limits can cause tire over heating resulting in permanent defor mation or catast
130. an be set at low medium high or off Select the level under Audio settings gt gt Volume compensation External audio source volume If an external devices such as an MP3 player or an iPod is connected to the AUX socket the device s volume may be different from the vol ume of the internal sound sources such as the disc player or the radio If the external sound source s volume is too high the quality of the sound may be impaired To help prevent this adjust the input volume of the external audio source 05 Infotainment General infotainment functions intended to enable the user to adapt sound reproduction to his her personal tastes Sound quality may be affected if the MP3 player is being charged while the system is in AUX mode To help prevent this avoid charging the MP3 player in a 12 volt socket while it is being played 1 Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX Press OK MENU or wait for several sec onds 2 Press OK MENU and turn TUNE to AUX input volume Confirm by pressing OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to adjust the volume 05 Optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre calibrated for optimal sound reproduction using digital signal pro cessing This calibration takes into account factors such as the speakers amplifier cabin acoustics the listeners seating positions etc for each com bination of vehicle infotainment system There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into co
131. an only be inserted in one way 6 Press the bulb holder into position in the headlight housing 7 Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb holder 8 Put the cover back into position and rein stall the headlight housing Turn signals 1 Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle see page 322 2 Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun terclockwise and pulling it out of the head light housing Pull out the holder to access the bulb Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise 5 Press the new bulb into the holder and turn it clockwise 6 Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise 7 Reinstall the headlight housing Side marker lights J NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb see page 322 a 4 G032357 Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle See page 322 Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun terclockwise and pulling it out of the head light housing Pull out the burned out bulb and install a new one It can only be inserted in one position Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise Reinstall the headlight housing 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs 08 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs G032359 The rear fog light located on the driver s side of the vehicle can be reached from behind
132. and children using the proper child restraint sys tem Only adults should sit in the front seats Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat see page 38 for guide lines Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident Whiplash Protection System WHIPS Whiplash Protection System WHIPS front seats only The WHIPS system consists of specially designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear when the vehicle is rear ended In the event of a collision of this type the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest head restraint to help support the occupant s head before moving slightly rear ward This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash e The WHIPS system is designed to sup plement the other safety systems in your vehicle For this system to function properly the three point seat belt must be worn Please be aware that no sys tem can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident e The WHIPS system is designed to func tion in certain collisions from the rear depending on the crash severity angle and speed 01 Safety 9 01 Occupants in the front seats must never sit out of position The occupant s back must be as upright as comfort a
133. andstill Queue Assist con sists of the following features Enhanced speed interval Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed including a complete stop In order to activate ACC at speeds below 18 mph 80 km h e The vehicle ahead must be within a rea sonable distance not farther away than approx 100 ft 30 meters e The lowest speed that can be selected is 18 mph 80 km h although ACC will also help maintain the set time interval to the i Option accessory for more information see Introduction vehicle ahead at lower speeds including a complete stop During short stops less than approximately 3 seconds in slow moving traffic your vehicle will begin moving again automatically as soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving ACC will be automati cally go into standby mode The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in one of the following ways e By pressing D e By accelerating up to at least 3 mph 4 km h Your vehicle will then resume following the vehicle ahead at the set time interval ACC can remain active and keep your vehi cle at a standstill for up to 2 minutes After 2 minutes have elapsed the parking brake will be engaged and ACC will go into standby mode To reactivate ACC the driver must release 5 parking brake see page 123 and press CH
134. anual shifting position The text in the instrument panel display will change from D to 1 2 Press the gear selector forward and release it this selects 2nd gear Press the selector forward again and release it to select 3rd gear 3 Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal Shiftlock override o N ei Y o 0 If the vehicle cannot be driven for example because of a dead battery the gear selector must be moved from the P position before the vehicle can be moved ED Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the center console to expose the small opening for overriding the shiftlock system 3 If the battery is dead the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low see page 114 nformation avidar D 03 Your driving environment Transmission E Insert the key blade into the opening Press the key blade down as far as possible and f keep it held down Move the gear selector The message AWD disabled Service from the P position For information on the required will be appear in the information key blade see page 61 display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system A warning light will also All Wheel Drive AWD4 illuminate in the instrument panel If this 03 occurs have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni cian E E o
135. appear from the box on the display screen This will disable the radio s capability to receive digital broadcasts but it will continue to func tion as a conventional analogue AM FM receiver Please note that when HD is switched off it will not be possible to tune to sub chan nels see the following section for a more detailed explanation of sub channels Repeat steps 2 4 above to reactivate HD an X will appear in the box on the display screen Please note that this will only switch HD on or off for the selected waveband AM FM1 etc Sub channels fD 105 1 WWPR 313 ALTO CLIMATE G044087 Example of an HD Radio station with sub channels 05 Infotainment CS 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 218 In many cases a main HD Radio station FM wavebands only will also have sub channels offering additional types of programming or music In such cases the symbol will be displayed to the left of the frequency number and a num ber will be displayed to the right of the fre quency number indicating that the currently tuned frequency has at least one sub channel The 2 in the illustration indicates that you are currently listening to the first sub channel on frequency 93 9 Selecting sub channels To listen to a station s sub channel s press and hold the right arrow key on the center con sole or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second To go back to the main channel pre
136. are selected using the number key buttons on the center console Manually storing preset stations 1 Tune to a station see Selecting a sta tion 2 Hold in one of the number key buttons gt The sound will be muted for several sec onds and when it returns the station has been stored on the number key button used A list of preset stations can be displayed This function can be activated deactivated in AM FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in AM menu Show presets Scan The function automatically searches the cur rent waveband for radio stations When a sta tion is found it is played for several seconds before scanning is resumed While the station is playing it can be stored as a preset in the usual way see Manually storing preset sta tions To start scanning in AM FM mode go to FM menu Scan or in AM menu gt Scan Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT oR Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func tion Radio text Some stations transmit information on pro gram content artists etc This information can be shown on the display 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 Activate deactivate in FM mode under Show radio text Introduction ALTO CLIMATE Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast HD radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations HD radio is a brand name registered by the Ibiquity digital c
137. arm Wait until the engine cools e lf it is necessary to top off the coolant when the engine is warm unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly so that the overpressure dissipates Brake fluid d A G031920 J i gt a Si d Location of the brake fluid reservoir Checking the level The fluid reservoir is concealed under the round cover at the rear of the engine compart ment The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res ervoir Check without removing the cap that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir Fluid type DOT 4 boiling point gt 536 F 280 C P N 9437433 Replace The fluid should be replaced accord ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet When driving under extremely hard conditions mountain driving etc it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician WARNING e fthe fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake related message is shown in the information display DO NOT DRIVE Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected e Dot 4 should never be mixed with any other type of brake
138. as well and replace those that are worn Check tire pressures e The brakes front wheel alignment and steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni Cian only e Check all lights including high beams e Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states provinces e Have a word with a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel e Consider your destination If you will be driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur consider snow tires Cold weather precautions If you wish to check your vehicle before the approach of cold weather the following advice is worth noting e Make sure that the engine coolant contains 50 percent antifreeze Any other mixture will reduce freeze protection This gives protection against freezing down to 31 F 35 C The use of recycled anti freeze is not approved by Volvo Different types of antifreeze must not be mixed e Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle s radiator e Try to keep the fuel tank well filled this helps prevent the formation of condensa tion in the tank In addition in extremely cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de icer before refueling e The viscosity of the engine oil is important Oil with low viscosity thinner oil improves cold weather sta
139. as started To help avoid excessive battery drain remove the remote key from the ignition slot if the infotainment system is used while the engine is switched off 05 Information Provided by CS 05 Infotainment 05 206 Getting started Infotainment system overview Sockets for external audio sources AUX and USB Steering wheel keypad O 7 display ER Center console control panel 1 Sirius Satellite radio 044535 Operating the system Short press switch the system ON Press and hold switch the system OFF Infotainment system mode buttons RADIO MEDIA or TEL Press a button to access the desired mode and press the same button again to access the mode s menus Release the button and wait sev eral seconds to automatically accept your selection You can also navigate in the menus by turning TUNE to make a selec tion and pressing OK MENU to confirm your selection Turn TUNE to navigate among the menu alternatives in the display FM1 DISC etc or to quickly scroll among tracks folders or radio stations E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Infotainment mode buttons Press a button to selecta mode RADIO use to select AM FM1 FM2 SAT SAT2 MEDIA use to select DISC AUX USB iPod or Bluetooth 6 TEL Bluetooth hands free cell phone operation ER MY CAR See page 133 Basic infotainment functi
140. ases the time interval slightly In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations WARNING e Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions e A short time interval gives the driver lim ited reaction time if an unexpected sit uation occurs in traffic Adaptive Cruise Control ACC The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display The same symbol is also displayed when Distance Alert is in active mode see page 164 Standby mode temporary deactivation Press f to temporarily deactivate cruise con trol put it in standby mode The set speed for example 55 mph is then shown in parenthe ses The previously set speed and time interval are resumed by pressing D There may be a significant increase in speed after the 5 button has been pressed When ACC is in active mode the vehicle s speed increases by approximately 1 mph 1 km h each additional time D is pressed e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 157 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 158 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Standby mode due to action by
141. ass level e Treble Treble level e Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers e Balance Balance between the right and left speakers 1 Premium Sound Multimedia only 2 Premium Sound Multimedia only e Subwoofer subwoofer volume level e DPL II center level 3 channel center level Volume for the center speaker e DPL Il surround level only when Sur round is on Surround level Advanced sound settings Equalizer Sound levels for different frequencies can be adjusted separately using this feature To do so 1 Press OK MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer 2 Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and confirm the change by pressing OK MENU Do the same for the other frequen cies 4 When you have finished making your set tings press EXIT to save Sound stage The sound experience can be optimized for the driver s seat both front seats or the rear seat If the front and rear seats are occupied the i Option accessory for more information see Introduction sound stage setting Front seats is recom mended Select one of the options under Audio settings Sound stage Audio volume and automatic volume control The infotainment system compensates for dis rupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume according to the speed of the vehicle The level of sound com pensation c
142. ass of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pres sure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perim eter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Maximum load rating a figure indicating the maximum load in pounds and kilo grams that can be carried by the tire This rating is established by the tire manufac turer Maximum permissible inflation pressure the greatest amount of air pres sure that should ever be put in the tire This limit is set by the tire manufacturer Recommended tire inflation pressure inflation pressure established by Volvo which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory This information can be found on the tire infla tion placard s located on the driver s side B pillar and in the tire inflation table in this chapter Cold tires The tires are con
143. at helps acquaint you with the system and the procedure for giv ing commands e Training A feature that enables the voice control system to become familiar with your voice and pronunciation and allows you to set up user profiles Two user pro files can be voice trained These support features are accessed by press ing the MY CAR button in the center console and turning TUNE to scroll to the desired menu selection Tutorial The tutorial feature can be started in two ways The tutorial feature can only be started when the vehicle is parked and the parking brake is applied e By pressing the voice control button and saying Voice tutorial e By pressing MY CAR and going to Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice tutorial Press OK MENU to begin the tutorial lesson The tutorial is divided into three lessons which take a total of approximately 5 minutes to com plete By default the system will begin with the first lesson To skip to the next lesson press the voice control button and say next Go back to a previous lesson by saying previous Press and hold the voice control button to exit the tutorial Training The system will display up to fifteen phrases for you to say To start the voice training proce dure press MY CAR and go to Settings gt Voice settings Voice training Select User 1 or User 2 and press OK MENU to begin After the training has been completed remem ber to set your user pro
144. atellite radio Listening to satellite radio The Sirius satellite system consists of a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit The digital signals from the Sirius satel lites are line of sight which means that physical obstructions such as bridges tunnels etc may temporarily interfere with signal reception Avoid any obstructions such as metal lic objects transported on roof racks or in a ski box or other antennas that may impede signals from the SIRIUS satel lites Selecting Sirius radio mode 1 With the infotainment system switched on press RADIO 2 Continue pressing RADIO or turn TUNE to scroll to select SAT 1 or SAT 2 and press OK MENU or wait for several seconds Activating Sirius radio 1 Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text Subscription update needed is displayed see also Selecting a channel Call Sirius at 1 888 539 SIRIUS 7474 If you tune to an unsubscribed channel the Sirius ID will be displayed The Sirius ID can also be accessed from the menu press OK MENU turn TUNE to scroll to the Advanced settings menu press OK MENU scroll to SIRIUS ID and press OK MENU to display the number 4 Updating subscription will be displayed while the subscription is being updated after which the display will return to the normal view SIRIUS ID The SIRIUS ID sometimes referred to as the E
145. ates the dialogue by saying Phone gt call contact or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system s prompts When calling contacts keep the following in mind e lf there are several contacts with similar names they will be presented in the dis 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control 05 kk 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control 05 play in numbered lines and the system will prompt you to pick a line number e Where are more lines in the list than can be displayed at one time saying Down will enable you to scroll downward in the list and saying up will take you back up through the list Dialing voicemail The dialogue below enables you to call your voicemail to check any messages that you may have received Your voicemail phone number must be registered in the Bluetooth function see page 236 The user initiates the dialogue by saying Phone gt dial voicemail or Phone dial voicemail Continue by responding to the system s prompts Rear Seat Entertainment RSE Screen channel A left channel B right yy Headphone socket On Off button A V AUX socket Remote control Headphones IR transceiver The RSE system provides entertainment for the rear seat passengers by making it possible to e g watch a film play music listen to the radio or connect an external device such as a game console RSE is fully integrated into the vehicle s info ta
146. ation e Auto brake brakes the vehicle automati cally if a collision with a pedestrian or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the brakes in time or steer around the person vehicle Auto brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs Since Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection is activated in cir cumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven tion The system should not be used in such a way that the driver changes his her way of operat ing the vehicle If the driver relies entirely on the system the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably The Collision Warning and City Safety sys tems supplement each other See page 167 for detailed information about City Safety No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100 correctly in all situations For that reason never test the Auto brake sys tem by driving toward a person or object This could result in serious injury or death Option accessory for more information see Introduction Collision Warning does not work in all driving traffic weather and road condi tions It does not react to vehicles not traveling in the same direction as your vehicle Collision Wa
147. ation pressure including the spare at least once a month and before long trips You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres sure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Use the recommended cold inflation pres sure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING e Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blow out with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury e Under inflated tires reduce the load car rying capacity of your vehicle When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the vehicle s tire information placard or certifi cation label Checking tire pressure Cold tires Inflation pressure should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the sur rounding ambient air This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours 07 Wheels and tires 07 kk 07 Wheels and tires 07 Tire inflation After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile 1 6 km the tires are con
148. ation of the device Key memory door mirrors and driver s seat The position of the side door mirrors and power driver s seat are stored in the remote keys when the vehicle is locked The next time the driver s door is unlocked with the same remote key and the door is opened within 2 minutes the power driver s seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the doors were most recently locked with the same remote key See page 85 for more information This feature can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle s menu by pressing MY CAR and going into Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory See page 133 for a description of the menu system See also page 63 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive Confirmation when locking unlocking the vehicle Settings can be made in the menu system for audible and visual confirmation when the vehi cle has been locked or unlocked With these functions activated the following will occur when the vehicle is locked unlocked Locking confirmation e The turn signals flash once an audible sig nal sounds and the door mirrors will fold in Confirmation will only be given when all doors and the tailgate are properly closed and locked If you do not receive confirmation when locking the vehicle check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar or if this feature has been turned off in the menu Unlocking confir
149. attery is replaced replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original See the decal on the battery 358 09 Specifications Overview of information and warning symbols 09 Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols The symbols in the vehicle s various displays are divided into three main categories Warning symbols GA lt E ei 2 Description e Warming symbols Symbol Description e e Indicator symbols Tg TA kp E 11 l ending Li e Information symbols c Low oil pressure ABL hee The following tables list the most common JE symbols their meaning and the pages in this Parking brake 78 Bod Malfunction indicator 77 manual that provide more detailed information Gi light Warning symbol Ro Lp The red warning symbol AM lights up to Anti lock brake sys 77 indicate a problem related to safety and or Ok oie alice de us tem ABS drivability A message will also appear in the main instruments panel s display A Seat belt reminder 79 i Rear fog light on 17 EEN BESCH Generator not charg 79 SS The information symbol D lights up and a ing text message is displayed to provide the driver Stability system 17 with necessary information about one of the BRAKE Fault in the brake sys 79 DSTC Hill Descent Of ity Assist Tire pressure monitor 77 A Warning symbol 79 ing sensor TPMS A Canadian models B Low fuel level CH e Opt
150. ave outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened Seat belt reminder d G017726 Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal an indicator light near the rearview mir ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts The audible signal and indicator light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is switched on regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion the audible signal and warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec onds Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions 01 Safety 9 01 kk 18 S 01 Safety Seat belts e t provides information about which seat belts are fastened in the rear seat A mes sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used This message will disappear after approximately 6 sec onds or can be erased by pressing the READ button on the left steering wheel lever e t also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion A visual and audible signal will be given These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button e The message Unbelt
151. belt except for the driver s belt is equip ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut When attaching the seat belt to a child seat 1 Attach the seat belt to the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Pull the seat belt out as far as possible Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle lock in the usual way 4 Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal The belt will now be locked in place This function is auto matically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions backrests in the front passenger s seat We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened Volvo s recommendations Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in the front seat of a car It s quite simple really A front airbag is a very powerful device designed by law to help protect an adult Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation a child should never be placed in the front seat even if he or she is properly bel ted or strapped into a child safety seat Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over sev enty five years and we ll continue to do our part But we need your help Please remember to put your children
152. board This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants 9 01 Safety Occupant Weight Sensor General information d G017724 Occupant Weight Sensor OWS indicator light Disabling the passenger s side front airbag Volvo recommends that ALL occupants adults and children shorter than 4 feet 7 inches 140 cm be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag and be properly restrained for their size and weight For child safety recommendations see page 38 The Occupant Weight Sensor OWS is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the passenger s side front airbag under certain conditions FE The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and seat belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger s side front airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The OWS will disable will not inflate the pas senger s side front airbag when e the front passenger s seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufac
153. board head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button sz gt gt 87 D 03 Your driving environment 03 CAUTION The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery For safety reasons no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi tions if the head restraints are folded down If these positions are occupied the head restraints should be in the upright fixed position Automatically folding down the rear seat s outboard head restraints o a e 10 t o o 1 The ignition must be in mode I or Il 2 Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button CAUTION The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery For safety reasons no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi tions if the head restraints are folded down If these positions are occupied the head restraints should be in the upright fixed position Folding down the rear seat backrests The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations to make
154. bout the RSE menus DVD menu If a DVD video is being viewed this selection will appear in the pop up menu See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE 05 kk 249 CS 05 Infotainment 05 200 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE Rear screen menu settings See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus Random See page 224 for additional information Repeat folder See page 225 for additional information DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered to play DivX VOD files from home burned discs or USB The registration code can be found by pressing the MY CAR button and going to Settings gt Information gt DivX VOD code Go to www divx com vod for additional information USB hub A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket see page 229 for additional informa tion 3 Applies to CD audio CDs DVDs USB and iPod 4 Applies to audio video files on home burned discs USB only Music video and radio Listening to music Music from disc tracks audio files can be played through the media player s USB AUX sockets or from streaming audio files coming from a Bluetooth connected cell phone For more information about the media player see page 225 see page 227 for information about the AUX USB sockets and see page 230 for
155. brake discs may result in delayed brake function This delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather prior to long term parking and after the vehicle has been washed Do this by brak ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving Emergency Brake Assistance EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden hard brak ing The system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed When the EBA system is activated the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released 03 Your driving environment EN Brakes Symbols in the instrument panel When the EBA system is activated the Symbol Specification brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increa BRAKE SEN Gow Chie Tins tree ses to the maximum level You must maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system com pletely There will be no braking effect if fluid level If the level is low fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid 03 loss the pedal is released EBA is automati cally deactivated when the brake pedal ABS is released Steady glow for two seconds whe
156. brake is applied automatically In certain situations ACC will apply the parking brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at a standstill This happens if Adaptive Cruise Control ACC e The driver opens the door or takes off his her seat belt e DSTC is put in Sport mode see page 149 e ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than 2 minutes e The engine has been switched off e The brakes have overheated Turning ACC off completely e From standby mode press sf once e From active mode press twice The set speed and time interval are then cleared from the system s memory and cannot be resumed by pressing CA The radar sensor and its limitations In addition to being used by ACC the radar sensor is also used by Distance Alert see page 164 and Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection see page 172 This sensor is designed to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle in the same lane e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 159 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control ACC WARNING Situations where ACC may not function Accessories or other objects such as extra optimally headlights must not be installed in front of the grille WARNING Modification of the radar sensor could make e The rada
157. button on the center console to temporarily deactivate the sys tem s gt The indicator light in the button will go out when the system has been deacti vated Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started or if the button is pressed the indicator light in the button will illuminate J NOTE Park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is applied Signals from the park assist system G044040 4 View in the display warning for objects front left right rear Visual indicator The audio system s display gives an overview of the vehicle s position in relation to a detected object The marked sectors in the display indicate that one or more of the sensors has detected an object The closer the car symbol comes to a sector the closer the vehicle is to the object If the infotainment system is switched off the park assist system will not be able to provide a visual indicator An audible signal will still be provided Audible signal The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft 80 cm of an object in front of or behind the vehicle If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle the tone alternates between front and rear speakers The level of the audible signal can be low ered raised
158. cccessseeeeeeeeees 180 Pem assist ON E 186 Rear Park Assist Camera PAC 190 Blind Spot Information System 194 Passenger compartment convenience 198 05 Infotainment laten 204 Getting started neneiia 206 General infotainment functions 211 eelere e e CO ceca UDDODDD po puaDand 214 2c 6 ICAA AA 223 Pee SB sockets MA mung 227 Bluetooth n k WW EE 230 Bluetooth hands free connection 233 Cell phone voice Control 241 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE 245 Remote contiolki A 254 Infotainment system Menus 256 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Contents Oo Gi Contents Pc 06 During your trip Driving recommendations cccceeee 262 GR El e EE 266 Bette ae DE ATA Cargo aroa e aI E EES 215 MENO a trailer EES A 278 Emergency tawino WEE E 281 07 Wheels and tires General information c cccseeeeeeeeees 286 RI gl E te GE 289 dE Wel ei 291 ME designations sees ee 292 Glossary of tire terminology 294 eile loading Pan 295 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 00 297 Snow chains snow tires studded tires 298 mporary SPIE S S 299 Tire Sealing SSTsm A denne 300 Changing a WISE RE 98 306 Tire Pressure Monitoring
159. ces How HD broadcasting works HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio and broadcasts of this type are available in many areas of the United States However there are a few key differences e Instead of transmitting one analogue sig nal stations send out a bundled signal both analogue and digital e An HD radio receiver can receive both dig ital and analogue broadcasts Depending on the terrain and location of the vehicle which will influence the signal strength the receiver will determine which signal to receive Limitations e Main channel vs sub channels FM only The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode both dig ital and analogue If a frequency has sub channels they are broadcast in digital mode only The main FM channel will be 1 HD Radio TM technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio TM and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp displayed as for example 93 9 WNYC Volvo uses the symbol gt to indicate there are sub channels available The sub FM channels will be displayed as 93 9 2 WNYC 93 9 3 WNYC etc e Reception coverage area Due to current IBOC transmitter power limitations the reception coverage area in digital mode is somewhat more limited than the station s analogue coverage area Please be aware that as with any radio broadcast technol ogy t
160. ces friction between leather and other fin ishes in the vehicle Volvo recommends cleaning protecting and conditioning your vehicle s leather two to four times a year Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft ener 943 7429 Cleaning leather upholstery 1 Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams 2 Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements 3 Dampen the stain thoroughly with the sponge Let the sponge absorb the stain do not rub 4 Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel and allow the leather to dry com pletely Protecting leather upholstery 1 Puta small amount of protectant cream on a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the upholstery with light circular move ments 2 Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight s harmful UV rays 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care CAUTION e Under no circumstances should gaso line naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage e Take extra care when removing stains such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread e Use solvents sparingly Too much sol vent can damage the seat padding e Start from the outside of the stain and work toward the center e Sharp objects e g pencils or pens in a pocket
161. connecting the connector pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring 1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive 4 Lower illustration under Headlight hous ing ES Unplug the wiring connector by holding down the clip with your thumb ER Pull out the connector with the other hand 5 Lift out the housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens 6 Replace the defective bulb s Reinserting the headlight housing When reinserting the housing be sure that the long locking pin to the left in the illustration is securely in place in both of its retaining clamps 1 Plug in the connector until it clicks into place 2 Reinstall the headlight housing and locking pins Check that they are correctly inserted The headlight housing must be properly inserted and secured in place before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted into the ignition slot 3 Check that the lights function properly The headlight wiring must be connected and the housing must be securely in place before the ignition is switched on Removing the cover to access the bulbs o D ba A Ee o 08 Maintenance and specifications Q Replacing bulbs 08 kk 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Replacing bulbs ORC Before starting to replace a bulb see page 322 1 Open the retaining clamps by pressing them to the sides 2 Pull the cover straight
162. creen settings When watching a video file a pop up menu can be displayed by pressing di on the remote control The content of this menu will vary depending on the what is being played viewed Day Night mode The screens can be set for three different light ing conditions Auto Day or Night Press d i onthe remote control and change the setting under Day Night mode on the screen See also page 251 for additional infor mation about the RSE menus Image settings Screen settings can be made for brightness contrast tint and color Press d i onthe remote control and change the setting under Image settings on the screen See also page 251 for additional infor mation about the RSE menus Screen aspect ratio Three screen aspect ratios can be set Normal Zoom 1 and Zoom 2 Normal The image on the screen is presented at the normal aspect ratio usually 4 3 or 16 9 Zoom 1 Full screen image but parts of the image will not be viewable Zoom 2 Full screen image but the aspect ratio will be slightly distorted Unless otherwise indicated the aspect ratio will be Normal Press d i onthe remote control and change the setting under Aspect ratio on the screen See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus Source menu The content of each source s pop up menu will vary depending on what is being played viewed for example Disc menu or USB menu See also page 251 for additional infor mation a
163. ction of the windshield where the IR coating is not applied A 1 9 in 47 mm B 3 4 in 87 mm An optional factory installed infrared IR coa ting can be applied to the windshield to help protect the cabin from the sun s heat and the fading effect of sunlight on upholstery panels etc Electronic equipment such as garage door openers electronic toll tags and similar devi 1 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated ces should not be placed on sections of the windshield with the IR coating because this could affect their function and limit their range For best performance place the device on the section of the windshield without the IR coating see the area marked in the illustration ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Power windows Power windows Operating Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened also open the front windows slightly 03 Manual up down Move one of the controls up down slightly gt The power windows move up down as long as the control is held in position G031423 Driver s door control panel Operating the power windows Geer ih s l l ove one of the controls up down as far M E 1 Switch for power child safety locks and E gt Manual up down as possible and release it disen
164. ction that the vehicle will take as it moves rearward which helps simplify parallel parking backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle WARNING e PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle It is not however intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment e The camera has blind spots where it cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle e Pay particular attention to people or ani mals that are close to the vehicle Function o Ee E Ed Si O The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and if a person or animal should suddenly appear from the side PAC is mounted on the tailgate near the open ing handle The camera has built in electronics that help reduce the fish eye effect so that the image shown on the screen is as natural as possible This may cause some objects on the screen to lean which is normal WARNING Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be if Option accessory for more information see Introduction Ambient lighting conditions The camera automatically monitors the ambi ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and constantly adjusts sensitivity to light This may cause the brightness and quality of the image on the screen to vary slightly Sensitivity to light is increased in dark conditions or in bad weather which may affect image quality If the image on the screen see
165. curs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gen erator the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests and electronic sensors wiring 01 Safety 9 Side impact protection SIPS airbags 01 WARNING e The SIPS airbag system is a supple ment to the structural Side Impact Pro tection System and the three point seat belt system It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations e The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment e No objects accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment e Never try to open or repair any compo nents of the SIPS airbag system This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician e In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection both front seat occupants should sit in an upright posi tion with the seat belt properly fastened e Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident o 9 01 Safety 01 Inflatable Curtain IC WARNING e The IC system is a supplement to the In order
166. d locks properly when CH Relay and fuse box closed Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner The cooling fan may start or continue to operate for up to 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off The ignition should always be completely switched off before performing any opera tions in the engine compartment The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages Special safety precau K The appearance of the engine compartment tions must be followed to prevent injury Pull the lever located under the left side of may vary depending on engine model Always turn the ignition off when the dash to release the hood lock An infor Coolant expansion tank e Replacing distributor ignition compo mation symbol will illuminate when the E estrofa l nents e g plugs coil etc hood is open A O e Do not touch any part of the distributor Lift the hood slightly Press the release Engine oil dipstick ignition system while the engine is run control located under the right front edge Radiator ning This may result in unintended of the hood to the left and lift the hood movements and body injury Filler cap for engine oil 08 Cover over brake fluid reservoir 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Checking the engine oil The oil level should be checked at regular inter vals particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service See page 356 for oil specifications Refer to the War
167. d play an external connected to the infotainment system MODE select AM FM1 FM2 HD Radio Sirius1 Sirius2 Disc USB iPod Bluetooth AUX and ON OFF ER Headphones sockets 3 5 mm Activating deactivating The control panel is activated by pressing MODE when the audio system is switched on It is switched off automatically when the audio system is switched off or by a long press on MODE 3 U S models only i Option accessory for more information see Introduction FAV storing a shortcut A pr The FAV button can be used to store frequently used functions making it possible to start the stored function by simply pressing FAV One favorite for example Equalizer can be pro grammed for each ofthe following infotainment system functions In RADIO mode e AM o FM1 FM2 e SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 In MEDIA mode e DISC e USB e iPod e Bluetooth e AUX Favorites can also be stored for TEL MY CAR CAM and NAV See page 133 for a description of the menu system To program a function on the FAV button 1 Select a mode e g RADIO MEDIA etc 2 Select a waveband or function AM Disc etc 3 Press and hold FAV until the mode func tion s favorite menu is displayed 4 Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of alternatives displayed and press OK MENU to confirm store your choice gt The next time the infotainment system mode RADIO MEDIA
168. d with the optional power tailgate see page 271 AAA 02 Locks and alarm Unlocking the tailgate from the Opening the tailgate manually passenger compartment 02 G044053 The tailgate is held closed by an electronic Press the button on the lighting panel 1 to locking mechanism To open unlock but not open the tailgate 1 Press lightly on the rubberized plate under the handle to release the lock 2 Lift the handle to open the tailgate The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been O CAUTION opened e When pressing the rubberized plate only light pressure is necessary to release the tailgate s electronic locking Locking the tailgate with the remote key Press the lock button A on the remote See mechanism mee Pega e When opening the tailgate pull it up The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin using the handle Too much pressure on flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and the rubberized plate can damage its that the alarm has been armed electrical connections 1 This button also opens but does not close the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate see page 271 Information Provided by WT The alarm system The alarm is automatically armed whenever the vehicle is locked with the remote key or optional Personal Car Communicator When armed the alarm continuously monitors a number of points
169. de Introduction Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Communicators PCC are provided with your vehicle They enable you to unlock the doors and tailgate and also function as ignition keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical com ponents The remote keys contain detachable metal key blades for manually locking or unlocking the driver s door and the glove com partment Up to six remotes can be pro grammed for use on the same vehicle 02 The PCCs have enhanced functionality com pared with the standard remote key In the remainder of this chapter all referen ces to the remote key also pertain to the PCC unless otherwise stated WARNING Never leave the remote key in the ignition if children are to remain in the vehicle Detachable key blade Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable metal key blade for mechanically locking or unlocking the driver s door and the glove com partment See page 61 for more information on the key blade The key blades have a unique code which is used if new ones need to be produced This code is available at an author ized Volvo retailer Loss of a remote key If either of the remote keys is lost the other should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer As an anti theft measure the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo Retailer You can also obtain ad
170. der This function makes it possible to play files in a folder repeatedly When the last file has been played the first file will begin again To acti vate 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function Playing video DVDs Play When playing a video DVD a disc menu may appear on the display giving you access to extra functions and settings such as choice of subtitle and language scene selection etc 3 Applies to audio video files on home burned discs USB only Video images will only be visible when the vehicle is not moving When the vehicle is traveling faster than approximately 4 mph 6 km h No visual media available while driving will be displayed Sound from the film will still be audible and video images will be shown again when the vehicle stops Navigating in a DVD s menus bi o KE KE o 0 Buttons in the center console control panel shown above are used to navigate in a DVD s menus Changing chapters or titles Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate among them if a film is playing it will be paused Press OK MENU to select a chap ter and return to the normal view If a film was playing it will resume Press EXIT to access the list of titles Turn TUNE to select a title and press OK MENU to confirm and return to the list of chap ters Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal view without having mad
171. der My XC60 Headlamp The SE Continuous high beams cannot be acti f failure is not func vated when the headlight switch is in gt Active Bending Lights or under Settings Service tioning position D OE High beam flash will gt Car settings gt Light settings Active required properly and 03 function in this position Bending Lights should be See page 133 for a description of the menu inspected Active Bending Lights ABL system repaired by F i l a trained and qualified Volvo serv This function is only active in twilight or dark ice techni conditions and only when the vehicle is in cian motion If a fault should occur in the system the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed as shown in the table 6021143 Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated left and activated right When this function is activated the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel see the right pointing beam in the illustration 1 The factory default setting is on kk gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 93 D 03 Your driving environment Lighting 03 o E o Ee e o Headlight control in position for parking lights The parking lights the license plate lights also come on can be turned on even when the igni tion is switched off Turn the headlight control to the
172. ditional or duplicate remote control keys from certain independ ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle California Only A list of independent repair facilities and or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found e onthe Volvo website at http www volvocars com us keys by calling Volvo Customer Care at 1 800 458 1552 The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found by pressing MY CAR and going into Information gt Number of keys See page 133 for a description of the menu sys tem USA 5WK49264 FCC ID KR55WK49264 Siemens VDO 5WK49236 FCC ID KR55WK49236 5WK49266 FCC ID KR55WK49266 Siemens VDO 5WK49233 FCC ID KR55WK49233 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation Canada 5WK49264 IC 267T 5WK49264 Siemens VDO 5WK49236 IC 267T 5WK49236 5WK49266 IC 267T 5WK49266 Siemens VDO 5WK49233 IC 267T 5WK49233 Operation is subject to the following condi tions 1 this device may not cause interfer a ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference including interference that may cause undesired oper
173. dlights ia Eee Headlight switch and lever E gt High beam flash Toggle between high and low beams 0 Daytime running lights high beams high beam flash 0 O Parking lights D Low beams high beams high beam flash YM High beam flash Move the lever toward the steering wheel to position 1 The high beams come on until the lever is released High low beam headlights Continuous high beams 1 Set the ignition to mode Il 2 With the light switch in position O or EN pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 to toggle between high and low beams this also applies on models equipped with the optional Active Bending Lights gt The symbol illuminates in the instrument panel to indicate that the high beams are on Low beams When the engine is started the low beams are activated automatically daytime running lights if the headlight control is in position O or KE Daytime running lights can be deactivated in the MY CAR menu system under Settings gt Car settings Light settings gt Daytime running lights However please be aware that these lights may not be deactivated in Canada Y o 03 Your driving environment Lighting ABL is activated automatically when the Symbol Display Explana engine is started ti e The use of daytime running lights is ion mandatory in Canada The function can be deactivated reactivated in l E the MY CAR menu system un
174. driver and passen cards The glove compartment can be locked ger 12 volt socket and small storage com manually with the key blade see page 67 partment kk Option accessory for more information see Introduction 199 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Vanity mirror 04 G021438 Vanity mirror with lighting The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted 12 volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I see page 82 The maximum current consumption is 10A 120W if only one of the 12 volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time the maximum current consumption per socket is 7 5A 90W The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer Always keep the sockets covered when not in use 12 volt socket in the cargo area 12 volt socket in the rear center console The electrical sockets can be used for 12 volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers For the socket to supply current the G031436 200 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket The 12 volt socket in the cargo area pro vides electrical curr
175. driving down a steep hill the sys tem s braking effect will decrease gradually gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment d 03 kk 125 D 03 Your driving environment Hill Descent Control HDC Engine response to pressure on the accel erator pedal may be slightly slower than normal when HDC is activated 03 126 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ED AN NINO CUS EE 130 Menus and Message mimada 131 The MY CAR nn 133 E lan e E E 139 Bb a eene E 147 Eli o PO 149 uo Activeschassis system o aa dd Gruise control A lacada 152 Adaptive Cruise Control WC canon cnnoncnnanconaoc canon 154 DN An 164 8 ie A fe 167 Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection 17 2 Wie AS e e EE 180 Pape ASS cen tie ta sce EE 186 Rear Park Assist Camera PAC renmen a a 190 BlindiSpot INFORMO NOS rra eia PTE Ee 194 Passenger compartment CONVeNI8eNCe occoccncocnnoneniccnnnonaninanoconrnonanonanos 198 128 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Volvo Sensus 04 130 Introduction G045223 Center console control panel 1 Volvo Navigation System VNS NAV see the separate VNS manual for operating instructions E Infotainment RADIO MEDIA TEL see the infotainment system overview begin nin
176. e Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle Additionally an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car s systems Any of your car s performance and safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tes ted or if you allow accessories to be instal led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi cle Damage caused by unapproved or improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information Volvo assumes no responsi bility for death injury or expenses that may result from the installation of non gen uine accessories A Introduction KEREN 16 Reporting safety CCC CIS iv cuicisina piernas 17 Seat o o PP PE ES PE A 18 Supplemental Restraint System GP 21 Occupant Weight Sensor E 26 Side impact protection SIPS airbags cccoccccocncocccncconncconnnonnnonaninnnos 30 Inflatable Curtain AA 32 Whiplash Protection System WIDE 33 uo RolloverProtection System RORO E 35 WEI A EE 36 Wie safety A Se CHB char Crear i ite SA EE 40 MET SS A MMO EE 42 AAA 44 BOOST USOS oo TEEN 46 Ee A TA AAA 47 Topitether QMGMOLS severe A 48 Integrated DOstert Dis m erm et iin Foren Ee 49 Child Safety Joch en leen eege Eer eee ert aad a 52 G D AL EF CAR e
177. e Answered calls Disconnect phone Main Bluetooth media menu Dialed calls Bluetooth menu Call duration Phone book Search Random Change device Remove Bluetooth device Bean New contact Bluetooth software version in car Speed dials Audio settings Receive vCard Memory status Clear phone book 1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes 05 Infotainment PC 259 260 Di e o A 262 ES A o EE 266 MA E EEN Zia SEO MI Eer e EE eee EE SS 275 GWG a TU en a oni ef 278 Emergency TOWN aos eeneg eege ge e 281 Information Provided by ho a k NA Le E ro Information Provided by EA 06 During your trip 06 Driving recommendations General information Economical driving conserves natural resources Better driving economy may be obtained by thinking ahead avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions Observe the following rules e Bring the engine to normal operating tem perature as soon as possible by driving with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for the first few minutes of operation A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject to increased wear e Whenever possible avoid using the vehicle for driving short distances This does not allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature e Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration and hard braking e Us
178. e Set the ventilation system control to air flow to floor windshield and side win dows and the blower control to its high est setting Weight distribution affects handling At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend This ensures good stability and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid Remember that these properties can alter with the vehicle load The heavier the load in the cargo area the less the tendency to understeer Handling roadholding Vehicle load tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling Therefore check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle load See the Tire pressure section Loads should be dis 06 During your trip Driving recommendations WARNING tributed so that capacity weight or maximum permissible axle loads are not exceeded Driving through water e The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 10 in 25 cm at a maximum speed of 6 mph 10 km h e Take particular care when driving through flowing water e Clean the electrical connections for trailer wiring after driving in mud or water e When driving through water maintain low speed and do not stop in the water After driving through water press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are funct
179. e That the seat belt is properly positioned and is taut e The shoulder section of the seat belt is across the child s collarbone not over the neck e The lap section of the seat belt is across the child s hips and not the abdomen Using an integrated booster cushion Stage 1 H ge 50 ES Pull the handle 1 forward and upward 2 to release the booster cushion Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position Stage 2 With the booster cushion in the stage 1 position press the button see the arrow in illustration 1 Lift the front edge of the booster cushion and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position ee Integrated booster cushion 01 Stowing the two stage integrated WARNING booster cushion The booster cushion cannot be moved from DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can the stage 2 upper position to the stage 1 occur lower position It must first be folded down completely to the stowed position and then Follow all instructions on the AQJUsicn to plaga booster cushion and in the vehi cle s owner s manual Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY A Press down on the center of the booster LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS cushion to return it to the stowed position SEATED e Use this booster cushion only with chil dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table se
180. e a TPMS sensor If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun ted on the vehicle TIRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed each time the vehicle is driven above 25 mph 40 km h for 10 minutes or more Once TPMS sensors are properly installed the warning message should not reappear If the message is still displayed drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph 30 km h or faster to erase the message Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle Volvo does not recommend moving sen sors back and forth between sets of wheels OD CAUTION When inflating tires with TPMS valves press the pump s mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve If you change to tires with a different recommended inflation pressure the TPMS system must be recalibrated to these tires On U S models this must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician On Canadian mod els see the following section Recali brating TPMS If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sen sor is moved to another wheel the sen sor s seal nut and valve core should be replaced When installing TPMS sensors the vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off If the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes a TPMS error message will be displayed Recalibrating TPMS Canadian models only In certain cases it may be necessary to
181. e a selection Changing chapters or title TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate in this list the film will pause if it is currently playing Press OK MENU to choose a chapter and return to the normal view in the display if a film was playing it will resume Press EXIT to access the list of titles In the list of titles turn TUNE to make a selec tion and press OK MENU to confirm This also returns you to the list of chapters Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal view without having made a selection It is also possible to change chapters by press ing ERI ES on the center console control panel or on the steering wheel keypad Advanced settings Angle If the DVD supports this function it is possible to select a camera angle for a certain scene 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 This can be done in DVD mode under DVD root menu Advanced settings Angle DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered to play DivX VOD files from home burned discs or USB The registration code can be found by pressing the MY CAR button and going to Settings gt Information gt DivX VOD code See page 133 for more information about the menu system See also www divx com vod for more informa tion Screen settings Screen settings can be made when the vehicle is not moving for e Brightness e Contrast 1 PressOK MENU and choose Image settings and conf
182. e and trailer have begun to sway See page 279 for more information This system is automatically deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode Operation Sport mode The stability system is always activated and cannot be switched off However the driver can select Sport mode which offers more active driving characteris tics In this mode the engine management sys tem monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by allowing more lateral movement of the rear wheels before DSTC is activated Under certain circumstances such as when driving with snow chains or driving in deep snow or loose sand it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tractive force If the driver releases pressure on the acceler ator pedal DSTC will also activate to help sta bilize the vehicle To switch to Sport mode 1 Press the My Car button in the center con sole control panel and select My XC60 gt DSTC in the menu 2 Unselect the symbol and leave the menu by pressing EXIT gt This puts DSTC in Sport mode Sport mode remains active until the driver switches it off in the menu or until the engine is switched off DSTC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 149 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Symbols and messages in the main instrument
183. e correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep inclines if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer In these situa tions the driver should always be prepared to apply the brakes if necessary Operation G027123 Controls and display Ch Resume previous settings increase speed each additional press increases speed by 1 mph approximately 2 km h Standby mode on off Set time interval O Put in active mode and set a speed O Set speed parentheses indicate standby mode O Time interval while it is being set Time interval after it has been set i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Putting ACC in standby mode Before ACC can be used to regulate speed and or the distance to a vehicle ahead it must first be put in standby mode To do so Press rf The 1 symbol appears in the display and parentheses indicate that ACC is in standby mode The driver s door must be closed and the driver s seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in active mode If the driv er s seat belt is taken off or if the driver s door is opened ACC will return to standby mode Setting a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode use the or buttons to store set the vehicle s current speed This puts the system in active mode The set speed for example 55 mph is shown in the display When the symbol on the ECKER
184. e manual is no longer ing status should only be done by a displayed the vehicle may be moved carefully Driving after a collision trained and qualified Volvo service tech from its present position if for example it is If the vehicle has been involved in a collision nician blocking traffic It should however not be the text Safety mode See manual may e After Safety mode See manual has moved farther than is absolutely necessary appear in the information display This indi been displayed if you detect the odor cates that the vehicle s functionality has been of fuel vapor or see any signs of fuel reduced leakage do not attempt to start the Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Safety mode has been set it should not be driven or towed pulled by another Attempting to start the vehicle vehicle There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to vehicle Leave the vehicle immediately This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle s electrical sys If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is control The vehicle should be transported tem is intact no fuel leakage you may attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali vehicle To do so fied Volvo service technician for inspection Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one 1 Remove the remote key from the ignition pels or more of the safety systems e g front or side slot and open the drive
185. e page 49 e Inthe event of a collision while the inte grated booster cushion was occupied 1 CAUTION the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed The booster cushion can be folded down com pletely stowed from either the stage 1 or stage 2 positions o S 01 Safety 01 52 Child safety locks Child safety locks N N o A o O Child safety locks rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs Use the remote control s key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizon tal position D The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical posi tion 1ormation Provided by AE e Doo F e Information Provided d Ki EEN Elle Kees plade E 56 Keyl ss CLIVE Ce a eaae a Ee 63 eier RK ee een a EE EE 66 Dabo Een tee Sire erent Det eh ad a 69 Information Provided by 6 d A Ad ER A LA EU A LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key bla
186. e pedal occa sionally when driving through rain slush etc This will remove the water from the brakes Check that brake application feels normal This should also be done after washing or starting in very damp or cold weather Severe strain on the brake system The brakes will be subject to severe strain when driving in mountains or hilly areas or when towing a trailer Vehicle speed is usually slower which means that the cooling of the brakes is less efficient than when driving on level roads To reduce the strain on the brakes shift into a lower gear and let the engine help with the braking Do not forget that if you are towing a trailer the brakes will be subjected to a greater than normal load Anti lock braking system ABS The Anti lock Braking System ABS helps to improve vehicle control stopping and steering during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup When the system senses impending lockup braking pressure is auto matically modulated in order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a skid The system performs a brief self diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal Another auto matic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph 10 km h The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module which is normal Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the
187. e rear section of the center con sole Q Under the front section of the center con sole WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches 22 cm to any of the keyless drive system s antennas This is to help pre vent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system 02 Locks and alarm 02 02 Locks and alarm Locking and unlocking the vehicle 02 From outside the vehicle The remote key locks and unlocks all of the doors and the tailgate Before the vehicle can be locked from the out side with the remote key the driver s door must be closed Any other door tailgate that is open will be locked and the alarm will be armed Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle If the vehicle is equipped with the optional key less drive system all doors tailgate must be closed before the vehicle can be locked The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver s door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate see also page 58 This setting can be changed in the menu system see page 134 If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed it may be necessary to replace the batteries in the remote see page 58 In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade See page
188. e the transmission s Drive D position as often as possible and avoid using kick down e Using the transmission s Sport mode may increase fuel consumption somewhat Use the transmission s Drive D position as often as possible See page 117 for addi tional information about Sport mode 1 Models with the T6 turbo engine only e Do not exceed posted speed limits Avoid carrying unnecessary items extra load in the vehicle Maintain correct tire pressure Check tire pressure regularly when tires are cold e Remove snow tires when threat of snow or ice has ended e Note that roof racks ski racks etc increase air resistance and also fuel con sumption e At highway driving speeds fuel consump tion will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the air conditioning off and the windows open e Using the onboard trip computer s fuel consumption modes can help you learn how to drive more economically Other factors that decrease gas mileage are e Dirty air cleaner e Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter e Dragging brakes e Incorrect front end alignment Some of the above mentioned items and others are checked at the standard maintenance intervals Driving with the tailgate open Driving with the tailgate open could lead to poisonous exhaust gases entering the passenger com partment If the tailgate must be kept open for any reason proceed as follows e Close the windows
189. ears based on the level of acceleration and speed The car must be at a standstill when shifting from position R to position D Geartronic manual shifting Geartronic allows you to manually shift among your vehicle s six forward speeds Geartronic can be selected at any time e To access the manual shifting position from Drive D move the gear selector to the right to the area marked M in the illus tration e Toreturn to the D position from the manual shifting position move the gear selector to the left While driving e f you select the manual shifting position while driving the gear that was being used in the Drive position will also initially be selected in the manual shifting position e Move the gear selector forward toward to shift to a higher gear or rearward toward to shift to a lower gear 1 The information display see page 75 shows the gear selector s position or the selected gear by displaying the following P R N D S 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 03 Your driving environment Transmission e If you hold the gear selector toward the transmission will downshift one gear at a time and will utilize the braking power of the engine If the current speed is too high for using a lower gear the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear to be used e If you slow to a very low speed the trans mission will automatically shift down Shiftlock Neutra
190. ect its drivability and safety CALIFORNIA proposition 65 Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of Cali fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cali fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules seat belt pretensioners adaptive steering columns and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 0 Re EE Important information Shiftlock When your vehicle is parked the gear selector is locked in the P Park position To release the selector from this position the ignition must be in mode II see page 82 or the engine must be running Depress the brake pedal press the button on the front side ofthe gear selector and move the selector from P Park Anti lock Brake System ABS The ABS system performs a brief self diagnos tic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal Another auto matic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph 10 km h The brake pedal will pulsate several times a
191. ed Sie E ill not be ged SE on rims they should be suspended off the See floor or placed on their sides on the floor responsibility for death injury or expenses that may result from such Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on installations their sides or standing upright but should not be suspended Tire wear E o CSSC Tire rotation Tires should preferably be stored in a cool Your vehicle has no required tire rotation Tire The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the dry dark place and should never be stored wear is affected by a number of factors such SR in close proximity to solvents gasoline oils as tire inflation ambient temperature driving e When switching between summer and ene style etc winter tires mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car e g 07 LF left front RR right rear e Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall kk If the tires are rotated they should only be moved from front to rear or vice versa They should never be rotated left to right right to left Ideally tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and thereafter at 6 000 mile 10 000 km intervals Some customers find that tire rotation may help to get extra mileage from tire life Tire rotation should only be performed if front rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1 16
192. ed Volvo service technician BLIS camera obscured Clean the lenses Blind spot syst camera blocked Blind spot info BLIS system on system ON 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D Blind Spot Information System Text in the dis System status play Blind spot info BLIS system off system OFF Blind spot syst The BLIS cameras Reduced function function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer between the BLIS 04 system s cameras and the vehicle s electrical system The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal Option accessory for more information see Introduction 197 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Storage spaces 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Passenger compartment convenience Compartment in door panel O Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions EN Glove compartment Storage compartment 12 volt socket and AUX input USB connector Jacket holder O Rear seat cup holders Y Storage pocket Jacket holder The jacket hanger is located on the inboard side of the front passenger s seat head restraint It is only intended for hanging light garments Tunnel console Storage compartment for CDs etc under The owner s manual and maps can be kept armrest AUX input USB connector here There are also holders for pens and fuel Includes cup holder for
193. ed in rear seat will appear in the information display if one of the rear doors has been opened The message in the information display can always be accessed even if it has been erased by pressing the READ button to display stored messages gt gasa ee Seat belt use during pregnancy The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly It must never be allowed to ride upward Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists As a pregnancy progresses pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel Within this context they should strive to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel Child seats Please refer to page 40 for information on securing child seats with the seat belts es General information y Ed 10 Y Y gt O Warning symbols in the instrument panel As an enhancement to the three point seat belts your Volvo is equipped with a Supple mental Restraint System SRS Vo
194. ee the illustration A tire with e g visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced immediately Improving tire economy e Maintain correct tire pressure See the tire inflation table on page 291 e Drive smoothly avoid fast starts hard braking and tire screeching e Tire wear increases with speed e Correct front wheel alignment is very important e Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and driving comfort e Tires must maintain the same direction of rotation throughout their lifetime 07 Wheels and tires General information e When replacing tires the tires with the e Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car s WARNING most tread should be mounted on the rear braking properties and ability to force wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer aside rain snow and slush e The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo during hard braking are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements Unap proved wheel tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle s sta e Contact a Volvo workshop if you are bility and handling unsure about the tread depth The tires with the most tread should always e Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the be at the rear to reduce the risk of skid tires and or wheels permanently ding Summer and winter tires e Any damage caused by installation of Storing wheels and tires unapproved wheel tire size combina When storing complete wheels tires mount
195. effect most effectively at speeds up to 30 mph 50 km h For sta tionary or slow moving vehicles the e The driver s actions always have high est priority and override the Collision Warning system This means that the system functions best if your vehicle s system will not intervene in situations here the driver is actively steerin tely 4 h D y 9 Se SE braking or pressing the accelerator pedal even if a collision is imminent e Warnings for stationary or slow moving vehicles may not be provided in dark conditions or in poor visibility e When Auto brake has prevented a col lision with a stationary object your vehi cle will remain at a standstill for approx 1 5 seconds If your vehicle has been The Collision Warning system uses the same braked for a moving vehicle ahead your radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control For vehicle s speed will be reduced to the more information on the radar sensor and its same speed as that vehicle s limitations see page 159 kk i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 175 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 176 Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection The camera s limitations The camera is used by Collision Warning with Auto brake Driver Alert Control see page 180 and Lane Departure Warning see page 183 To help protect the camera in very hot conditions it may be temporarily switched off for approximately
196. ehicles equipped with a jack the condi tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais ing the vehicle see page 306 for information about using the jack and removing a wheel and performing a visual inspection of the brake pads WARNING e If the vehicle has been driven immedi ately prior to a brake pad inspection the wheel hub brake components etc will be very hot Allow time for these com ponents to cool before carrying out the inspection e Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park P position e Block the wheels standing on the ground use rigid wooden blocks or large stones e Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire For any other job use stands to support the vehicle e The jack should be kept well greased and clean and should not be damaged e Be sure the jack is on a firm level non slippery surface e No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle e The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment e Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when the brakes are applied Adaptive brake lights The adaptive brake lights activate in the event of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti vated This function causes an additional tail light on each side of the vehicle to illu
197. ehind the chide back or under the click is audible arm a JE 01 Safety 9 ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors 01 3 Fasten the attachment on the child restraint s lower straps to the ISOFIX LATCH LATCH lower anchors 4 Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer s instruc tions Volvo s ISOFIX LATCH anchors conform to FMVSS CMVSS standards Always refer to the child restraint system s manual for weight and size ratings NOTE Lower anchors for ISOFIX LATCH equipped E d Ei o Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors child seats are located in the rear outboard e The rear seat s center position is not seats hidden below the backrest cushions equipped with ISOFIX LATCH lower e Be sure to fasten the attachment cor Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchors When installing a child p SS eit sen anchor positions as shown To access the restraint in this position attach the e anchors kneel on the seat cushion and locate restraint s top tether strap if it is so tenes tae eM test ale Oy Ne eee the anchors by feel Always follow your child equipped to the top tether anchorage EE secured in the event of a colli seat manufacturer s installation instructions point and secure the restraint with the and use both ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors veni presa copa e The ISOFIX LATCH FOREST ellie EH and top tethers whenever possible e Always f
198. elector is moved to R This setting can be changed in the in MY CAR menu e lf there are two cameras installed on the vehicle to switch between cameras turn TUNE at least one of the cameras has to be active press CAM repeatedly or use the center console controls If the front camera is on it overrides the optional park assist system s visual indicator but there will still be an audible signal Limitations Even if a fairly small section of the screen image appears to be obstructed this may mean that a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid den and objects there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun ted on the tailgate may obstruct the cam era s field of view Keep in mind e Keep the camera s lens free of dirt ice and snow Remove ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lens e Clean the lens regularly with warm water and a suitable car washing detergent e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Rear Park Assist Camera PAC 04 193 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 194 Blind Spot Information System Introduction BLIS camera EN Indicator light E BLIS symbol The Blind Spot Information System BLIS is an information system that indicates the presence of another vehicle moving in the same direction as your vehicle in the side view mirror s
199. en the AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen sor is always engaged Activate or deactivate this function in Climate settings Interior air quality system The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid fogging If the insides of the windows start fog ging disengage the air quality sensor Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front side and rear win dows e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co imate system 04 kk 145 04 Air to windows Some air flows from the dashboard air vents The air is not recirculated Air condition ing is always engaged Air to windshield and side windows Some air flows from the air dashboard vents Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system To remove de fog de ice the front side win dows and windshield quickly In cold or humid weather blower speed should be moderate to high To ensure good com fort in warm dry weather To ensure efficient cooling in warm weather Air to the floor and windows Some air flows from the dashboard air vents Air to floor and from dash board air vents Air to floor Some air flows to the
200. engine is warm This constitutes a fire risk Exterior lighting Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights fog lights or taillights This is nor mal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture Normally condensation will dissi pate after the lights have been on for a short time Polishing and waxing e Normally polishing is not required during the first year after delivery however wax ing may be beneficial e Before applying polish or wax the vehicle must be washed and dried Tar spots can be removed with kerosene or tar remover Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing compound e After polishing use liquid or paste wax e Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax Waxing alone does not substitute for pol ishing a dull surface e A wide range of polymer based waxes can be purchased today These waxes are easy to use and produce a long lasting high gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation road dirt and fading e Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 F 45 C 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care 08 kk 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Vehicle care OD CAUTION Volvo does not recommend the use of long life or durable paint protection coatings some of which may claim to prevent pit
201. ent Keep the following in mind to help minimize battery drain When the engine is not running avoid using ignition mode Il Many electrical sys tems the audio system the optional navi gation system power windows etc will function in ignition modes 0 and I These modes reduce drain on the battery Please keep in mind that using systems accessories etc that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not run ning could result in the battery being com pletely drained Driving or having the engine running for approximately 15 minutes will help keep the battery charged The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even with 06 kk 06 During your trip 06 Driving recommendations the ignition switched off which drains the battery Before a long distance trip It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv ice technician before driving long distances Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs fuses spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur As a minimum the following items should be checked before any long trip e Check that engine runs smoothly and that fuel consumption is normal Check for fuel oil and fluid leakage Have the transmission oil level checked Check condition of drive belts Check state of the battery s charge Examine tires carefully the spare tire
202. ent even when the igni tion is switched off Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the bat tery 04 AAA Information Provided by PME OCLC e EE 204 BR er ie O EEN 206 General infotainment FUNCTIONS cooccccccncncnnccancncncnnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnonnccanonanos 211 O 0 cae A rs 214 Media A a MMR cco E E T 223 ON k E T 227 EI at aia a 230 Bluetooth hands free CONNECTION occcccccccnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan nn nnnnnns 233 A VOIS CONO a EE 241 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE ar cc o7 272 pumas 245 Remote GOUT Ae a ana n A 254 Infotainment Sye A Senneng E At 256 202 Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt SS als SS INFOTAINMENT Information Provided by ae CS 05 Infotainment 05 204 Introduction General information The infotainment system in your vehicle is available in two versions High Performance Multimedia 7 color TFT display Voice control Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key pad AM FM HD radio Sirius satellite radio CD DVD mp3 and wma file formats AUX and USB sockets Bluetooth hands free streaming 8 speakers 4x40W amplifier Premium Sound Multimedia 7 color TFT display Voice control Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key pad AM FM HD radio Sirius satellite radio CD DVD mp3 and wma file formats AUX and USB sockets Bluetooth hands free streaming 12 speakers 5x130W amplifie
203. enter head resiramt 87 e elle AAA eee eee nay 87 A 143 Rearview mirror AUtO diM Tupnchon 104 COMPASS oros 105 Rear window defroster 104 Recalls child restramte 39 Remigio 397 E ae BE 266 267 fuel filler GAD tere rd 269 HOENEN gaere den 268 fuel tank volume NEE 357 Registering child restraints 39 Remote Control 254 replacing battertes kk 255 Remote EE 56 approach 8 Te Lal Ususario 58 nie e NZ EE 57 o eegenen 56 61 key Memo eesgee does 57 locking the vehicle ccooocccoocniom 58 Personal Car Communicator 58 59 replacing the batter bk 61 unlocking the vehicle oocccon nmom 58 Remote key PCC COMMON FUNCTIONS ssssseseeeeesnn eneee 58 Reporting safety detecte uk 17 Roadside Assistance 362 Rollover Protection System ROPS 35 Roll Stability Control DG 35 ROOT IO ACS E 274 Safety DOCU isc 16 Safety defects reportino ccoocccconnoco 17 Seat belt O eE e on E T E 19 Seat belts Automatic locking retractor Emergency locking retractor acciona 38 BUCKIN crisis 18 malntenancCe 18 Dr iensioners 18 ena 18 reminder warning light 78 securing child restraint sys A 42 44 46 ai eer ie otitis 18 USE during Drednancn 20 EUS NG EE 18 Seats ON EE 84 85 ee 130 o A 11 Side door mirror 103 Side impact airbage 30 Side marker lights changing bulbs 325 Sirius satellite radi
204. epart Warn Standby lt 40 mph Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 65 km h Lane Depart Warn Unavailable Lane departure warning ON Lane There are two alternatives On at start up This selection switches LDW on each time the engine is started Otherwise the system will be in the mode that it was in when the engine was switched off Increased sensitivity This selection increa ses the function s sensitivity Warnings will be given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations apply When this setting is being used the sys tem only needs to monitor lane marker lines on one side of the vehicle to change status to Lane Depart Warn Available i Es ka The function is switched on or off The text disappears after 5 seconds The function is monitoring the road s marker lines The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle s speed is below 40 mph 65 km h The road lacks clear marker lines Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Driver Alert System Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning due to snow ice or dirt on the windshield Clean KI the area of the windshield in front of the camera See page 176 for information on the camera s limitations BDE Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in t
205. er into the hitch assem bly Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly 4 Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly ball holder 5 Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt Removing the ball holder 1 Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder hitch assembly 2 Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem bly OR A cover for the hitch assembly is also included in the kit Trailer Stability Assist TSA Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system DSTC See page 149 for information on DSTC Function A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for various reasons Normally this only occurs at high speeds but for example if the trailer is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the trailer there is risk of swaying at speeds 06 kk 06 During your trip 06 between approximately 45 55 mph 70 90 km h Swaying may be caused by factors such as e The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden strong crosswind e The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an uneven road surface or drive over a bump e Sudden movements of the steering wheel Facts about TSA e TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi mately 40 m
206. errain time of day foliage level and building location can have positive or neg ative effects on radio reception e Analogue to digital digital to analogue blending Analogue to digital blending will occur as the signal strength reaches a pre set threshold in the receiver This will be noticeable in fringe areas areas with weak reception and is normal There may be a noticeable difference in sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue occurs such as Volume increase or decrease Equalizer settings i e Bass Midrange Treble cut or boost Time alignment Digital program mate rial in extreme cases can be as much as 8 seconds behind the analogue This will noticeable as a stuttering effect The above items are dependant on the broadcaster s equipment settings and do not indicate a fault in the vehicle s radio receiver or antenna systems Switching HD on or off The factory setting for HD radio is off How ever when driving through areas with weak HD signals fringe areas you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between ana logue digital and digital analogue reception If this happens it may be desirable to switch HD off To do so 1 Be sure the audio system is switched on and in one of the AM or FM modes 2 Press OK MENU in the center console control panel 3 Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD Radio 4 Press OK MENU to turn HD off the X will dis
207. ert a small screwdriver in the hole behind the spring loaded catch and care fully pry up the cover Turn the remote key with the buttons upward so that the batteries do not fall out when the cover is removed Replacing the batteries CAUTION When handling batteries avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key Note the position of the battery s or sides Remote key one battery 1 Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat tery 2 Inserta new one with the side down ward PCC two batteries 1 Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat teries 2 Insert the first new battery with the side upward 3 Insert the plastic spacer over the battery Insert the second new battery on top of the plastic spacer with the side downward Re assembling the remote key 1 Press the remote key s cover into place 2 Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up Carefully slide the key blade into its groove Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place Old batteries should be properly recycled 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive Keyless drive models with Personal Car Communicator only gt Lock settings gt Keyless entry See page 133 for a description of the menu system e The gear selector must in the P position 02 Keyless locking and unlocking before the vehicle can be locked
208. erval ei A R A o oO Controls and display Time interval Increase decrease O Time interval On while it is being set Q Time interval On after it has been set Press to increase the interval or to decrease it Five different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal bars The greater the number of bars the longer the time interval One bar rep resents approximately 1 second to the vehicle ahead 5 bars is approximately 2 5 seconds The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the dis play The same symbol is displayed when Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is activated e The higher your vehicle s speed the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead measured in feet meters for a given time interval The set time interval is also used by Adaptive Cruise Control see page 156 WARNING Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions Limitations Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col lision Warning system See page 159 for more information on the radar sensor s limitations Strong sunlight reflections extreme light contrasts the use of sunglasses or if the driver is not looking
209. ervlew 74 75 Instrument Panel cccsccessseeeeeeseeeeees 1311 Integrated two stage booster cushion 49 Interior Air Quality Gvsiem 140 Interior UNO E 95 96 iPod connector audio system 227 ISOFIX LATCH anchors 47 Jack MACNN DEE 306 location OF GEN 306 NS STANG eeina 114 eebe 56 61 63 Keyless drive general descriGotion EN 63 starting the vebucle ue 112 L Labels es ee 391 LOCATION Ol GE 350 Laminated panoramic roof 106 LATCH E elei 47 Leather Caruana id 344 eletcl ee E 92 Load anchoring evelets ek 213 Loading the vehicle ccc oo 271 295 e 274 elteren 66 WANG AUG eege deeg AEN 67 Locking the vehicle ccconccicccnnnccoconononos 58 Locks child Safety ooonccocononnccocononono 52 Ho e e o 92 Low fuel level warning light 77 Low oil pressure warning light 78 Main instrument Da nel s nnannannannannnanna 131 Maintenance ccccccsseccsecceseeeeeeseeeeees 314 hoisting the vehicle ccoo cccconnniom 315 performed by the owner 315 Malfunction indicator light 76 Media player infotainment system 223 DYN A oo A sans te A E A A 133 Messages in the instrument panel 131 Mirrors GET OSL E 104 DOW Gl COOP E 103 rearview auto dim function 104 retractabDleinnancitoaaos condice siniaasd 103 la sed tacos
210. es Clean the wiper blades with a stiff bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent Replacing the tailgate wiper blade Location of the washer fluid reservoir The windshield and headlight washers share a common reservoir The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment Dur ing cold weather the reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze For capacities see page 357 o N N N Es Ei o Fold the wiper arm outward 2 Grasp the inner section of wiper blade at the arrow 3 Pull out the blade to release it from the wiper arm 4 Press the new wiper blade into place and 08 check that it seats securely 5 Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate window Warning symbols on the battery Wear protective goggles Keep away from children Avoid smoking open flames and or sparks See the owner s manual Contains corrosive acid e Risk of explosion Recycle properly A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner Con sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station Handling Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running for example when replacing the battery If the battery is fully discharged a number of times this may shorten its se
211. escription Driver Alert System 183 Lane Departure Warn ing CA Seat belt reminder 19 Adaptive Cruise Con 156 trol 162 RASSENGER B Occupant Weight 26 Sensor Information symbols in the center console display Description da Audio files 223 W CD folder 223 a Video files 223 ME Bluetooth connected 234 cell phone Bluetooth hands 234 free HD HD radio 216 Pa CTD Park Assist 186 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 361 09 Specifications 09 Volvo programs Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance Additional informa tion features and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment If you require assistance dial In the U S 1 800 638 6586 1 800 63 VOLVO In Canada 1 800 263 0475 Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training Volvo sup ports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence A S E Certi fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas Besides passing exams each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued These pro fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition nformation Provided b
212. est can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load Fold the backrest as follows E Move the seat as far back and down as possible ES Adjust the backrest to an upright position Option accessory for more information see Introduction E e Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest Without releasing the catches push the backrest forward Move the seat as far forward as possible so that the head restraint slides under the glove compartment WARNING When transporting long objects cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops When the seat s backrest is returned to the upright position push and pull it to be sure that it is securely locked in this position GD Front edge of seat cushion up down 2 Seat forward rearward and up down Backrest tilt Operation The seats can be adjusted for a short period after unlocking the door with the remote con trol without the key in the ignition slot Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made when the engine is running Only one of the power seat s controls can be used at the same time The power seats have an overload pro tector that activates if a seat is blocked by any object If this occurs switch off the ignition key in position 0 and wait for a short period before operating the seat agai
213. ets are used to differentiate a number of components functions points of information that can be listed in random order For example e Coolant e Engine oil Continued gt gt This symbol can be found at the lower right corner of an odd numbered right hand page to indicate that the current topic is continued on the following page Options and accessories Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets Please note that some vehicles may be equipped dif ferently depending on special legal require ments Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor mation All information illustrations and specifi cations contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time or to change spec ifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that coun try s applicable safety and emission control requirements In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements Modifications to the emission control system s may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U S Canada and other countries WARNING If your vehicle is involved in an accident unseen damage may aff
214. eyes Precautions Keep out of reach of children Do not ingest the contents Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin Hands should be washed thoroughly after handling First aid Skin Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water Get medical attention if symptoms occur Eyes Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids Get medical attention if symptoms occur e Inhalation Move the person to fresh air If irritation persists get medical atten tion Do not break the seal on the bottle This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System WARNING 07 kk E Ee ei gt Ei o 07 Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two stages Stage 1 The hole is sealed by pumping sealing compound into the tire The car is then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire Do not remove any foreign objects nails etc from the tire before using the sealing system Stage 2 The tire s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary Never leave the tire sealing system unattended when it is operating Keep the tire sealing system away from children Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic Apply the parking brake Stage 1 Sealing the hole Open the cover on the tire seal
215. f it is moved out of range 05 Random This function plays the audio files on the exter nal device in random order shuffle This func tion can be activated deactivated under Bluetooth menu gt Random Press the buttons on the center con sole or steering wheel keypad to change tracks Scanning audio files on an external device This function plays the first ten seconds of each audio file This function can be activated deactivated under Bluetooth menu Scan Introduction System overview Cell phone 2 Location of the microphone EN Steering wheel keypad E Center console control panel and display Bluetooth hands free This feature makes it possible to set up a wire less connection between a Bluetooth ena bled cell phone and the vehicle s infotainment system This enables the infotainment system to function as a hands free connection and allows you to remote control a number of the phone s functions The microphone used by this system is located near the driver s side sun visor 2 The buttons and other controls on the cell phone can always be used regardless of whether or not the phone is connected to the hands free system TEL menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system Not all cell phones are fully compatible with the hands free system A list of compatible phones is available at
216. file in Voice user setting Other voice control settings found in MY CAR e Voice user setting Two user profiles can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Settings gt Voice settings Voice user setting Select User 1 or User 2 e Voice output volume Press MY CAR and go to Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice output volume Press OK MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the volume Press EXIT to save the change and exit the menu Using voice commands The driver initiates a voice command dialogue by pressing the voice control button see the illustration on page 241 When a dialogue has been initiated commonly used commands will be shown in the display Grayed out texts or texts in parentheses are not part of the sooken command Once you become familiar with the system you can speed up the command dialogue by briefly pressing the voice control button to skip prompts from the system Commands can be given in several ways For example the command Phone call con tact can be spoken as e Phone gt Call contact say Phone wait for a system response and then continue by saying Call contact e Phone call contact give the entire com mand at one time The following is a list of features that can be voice controlled with a Bluetooth connected cell phone Shortcuts Shortcut commands for using the phone can be found in the MY CAR menu system under Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice
217. floor mat at a time on the driver s floor An extra mat on the driver s floor can cause the accelerator and or brake pedal to catch Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded e Volvo s floor mats are specially manu factured for your car They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trap ped under the pedals on the driver s side 1 Press the remote key into the ignition slot as far as possible with the metallic key blade pointing outward not inserted into the slot Depress the brake pedal 3 Press and release the START STOP ENGINE button The autostart function will operate the starter motor until the engine starts or until its overheating function stops it 1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger s compartment 2 If the vehicle is moving it is only necessary to press the START STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds If the engine has not started repeat the procedure Keyless drive To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless drive feature one of the remote keys must be in the passenger compartment Follow the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle z Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine Always remove the remote key from the ignition slo
218. for the IC to provide its best pro General information G032025 This system consists of inflatable curtains located along the sides of the roof liners stretching from the center of both front side windows to the rear edge of the rear side door windows It is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating posi tions in certain side impact collisions In certain side impacts both the Inflatable Cur tain IC and the Side Impact Airbag System SIPS airbag will deploy The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously OKT If the inflatable curtain deploys it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds Side Impact Protection System It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle Never try to open or repair any compo nents of the IC system This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Never hang heavy items from the ceiling handles This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in 5 cm below the upper edge of the rear side windows Objects placed higher than this level could impede the func tion of the Inflatable Curtain tection both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt prop erly fastened adults using the seat belt
219. g on page 206 EN Vehicle related settings MY CAR see page 133 O Park assist camera CAM see page 190 O Climate system see page 139 Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a number of functions such as the individualized settings that can be made in the MY CAR menus the climate and infotainment systems as well as other options such as the park assist camera s etc Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center instrument panel to display information and selections are made using this panel s controls and buttons Certain features can also be con trolled using the steering wheel keypad Press MY CAR to present all of the available settings related to driving and or controlling the vehicle such as City Safety setting the clock lock settings etc Press RADIO MEDIA TEL NAV and CAM to change a source and to activated systems or functions such as AM FM1 CD DVD Blue tooth navigation and the park assist camera See the respective sections in this manual for more detailed information about your vehicle s various features and functions ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Main instrument panel ee 2 34 Information VI zap Information display and menu controls ap READ access to the list of messages and message confirmation 2 Thumbwheel browse among menus and options in the list of functions
220. gaging rear power window buttons Aut je see page 52 ER Auto up down gt The window will open or close com O Bear window controls All power windows can o operated using the pletely control panel in the driver s door The control Resetting Front window controls panels in the other doors only operate the win If the battery has been disconnected the auto dow in the respective doors open function must be reset so that it will work WARNING For the power windows to function the ignition properly must be in at least mode I When the vehicle y nac nde has been running the power windows can be s operated for several minutes after the remote e Never leave children unattended in the key has been removed from the ignition slot or vehicle until a door has been opened 2 Release the button briefly e Make sure that the windows are com pletely unobstructed before they are operated Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second e Always remove the ignition key when Raise the front section of the button again for one second kk i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 101 D 03 Your driving environment 03 102 Power windows Laminated glass Ai This glass is reinforced to help pro E vide protection against break ins and SD improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment The windshield laminated panoramic roof a
221. ght 295 Hazard warning Hashers 94 AD GIG Elle EE 216 Headlights Active Bending LightS oo 93 CHANGING le etdegesscgteger Agen 323 324 high low beams 92 high beam Taehb kk 92 Headlight washers uk 99 e e leie 246 Head restraints rear seat 87 Heated oxygen sensors 270 Heated rear S ats cccecsecssseceeseeeeeenees 143 Migh DEANS E 92 eil de ele EE T7 Hill Descent Control 125 Hoisting the vebuce sek RENE 315 HomeLink Wireless Control System 109 Home safe Te dn D 96 Hood openmo cloeimg o 317 on tune taeaaneuueee seccesatigu tees 91 o A 82 leiere ea E 57 Important mtormation 8 lte ege T l lee cocos inicias 15 16 77 78 IMA EE ticctescneicmistanocumnrennendieaiasasaucics 42 Inflatable Curtam 32 Inflation Dreseure 289 Inflation pressure Lable 291 Information and warning symbols table PA 359 Information lights 15 16 77 78 Information evrpbagl ee eseeEeSESESES EENS euien 77 Infotainment evstem uk 204 AUX USB sockets 227 Bluetooth devices 230 Bluetooth hands free system 233 general fupnchons EEN 211 getting started oooncccnnnccncninncnninononnns 206 media PlayOcio e vie eg RER deet 223 MENUS to 256 radio TUNCUIONS cisne 214 rear seat entertainment system remote o A 254 sound SCUUNGS ocacinnniainais taaan 212 VOICE CONTO ainia acid 241 Inspection reacdhness A 315 d fie n INTA DEE 92 Instrument Ov
222. h include steel nylon polyester and others Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire Refer to the vehicle s tire information placard located on the B Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehi cle 07 Wheels and tires Tire designations 11 Treadwear Traction and Temperature grades see page 297 for more informa tion 12 Maximum permissible inflation pressure the greatest amount of air pres sure that should ever be put in the tire This limit is set by the tire manufacturer 07 Information Provided by 07 Wheels and tires Glossary of tire terminology Terms The tire suppliers may have additional mark ings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 07 Tire information placard A placard showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can Carry Tire Identification Number TIN A num ber on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and man ufacturing plant tire size and date of man ufacturer Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Met ric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability Extra load A cl
223. he SRS sensors which trigger the front airbags are designed to react to both the impact of the collision and the inertial forces generated by it and to determine if the intensity of the collision is sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners and or airbags to be deployed However not all frontal collisions activate the front airbags e If the collision involves a nonrigid object e g a snow drift or bush or a rigid fixed object at a low speed the front airbags will not necessarily deploy e Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation e The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags should have deployed or not 1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26 YAA A WARNING e Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions backrests in the front passenger s seat We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches 140 cm in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened e Never drive with the airbags deployed The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle Other safety systems can also be damaged e The smoke and dust formed when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation in the event of pro longed exposure Should you have questions about any compo nent in the SRS system please contact a tr
224. he display 04 w Option accessory for more information see Introduction 185 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 186 Introduction The park assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces garages etc It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front bumper and rear bumper s to measure the dis tance to a vehicle or an object that may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle An audible signal and symbols in the audio sys tem s display indicate the distance to the object WARNING Park Assist is an information system NOT a safety system This system is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle It is not however intended to replace the driver s attention and judge ment Function Park assist button The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started The indicator light in the but ton in the center console illuminates when the system is on e The front park assist system is active from the time the engine is started until the vehi cle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph 15 km h It is also active when the vehicle is backing up e Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected i n R A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Activating deactivating The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started Press the Park assist
225. he engine the Engine Control Module or the vehicle may be ille gal and can cause three way catalytic con verter or exhaust system overheating This includes altering fuel injection settings or the electrical fuel or distributor ignition components altering emission system 06 systems may cause unusually high three components or location or removing com way catalytic converter temperatures Do ponents and or repeated use of leaded not continue to operate your vehicle if you fuel detect engine misfire noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating condi NOTE a e er ie vi Kg Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three way catalytic converters 2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled the Check Engine Light malfunction indicator lamp may indicate a fault However your vehicle s performance will not be affected Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps gt gt 06 During your trip Refueling Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy gen content of the exhaust gases Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combus tion to help reduce harmful emissions 06 Information Provided by 06 During your trip Introduction WARNING Power tailgate The load car
226. he grille is dirty or obstructed in some way Clean the radar surface or remove the object causing the obstruction Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals No action possible Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar w Option accessory for more information see Introduction 161 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control ACC XA E AI Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible A very wet or snow covered road surface may affect the radar signals the function of the radar The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed Symbols and messages in the display D Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected 04 Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed distance Time interval while it is being set Time interval after it has been set Turn on DSTC to enable ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode Switch DSTC to Cruise normal operating mode see page 149 for more information ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC s Spin control is switched off See page 149 for more information gt Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off The driver must regulate t
227. he remote control s Le button to select a screen L left rear screen F front screen or R right rear screen Point the remote control toward a screen s IR trans ceiver and press MEDIA one or more times i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction to select the desired source Disc or USB release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted 3 Insert a DVD in the infotainment system s media player or connect an external device to the vehicle s USB socket Playback and navigation Play a video track video file by pressing gt on the remote control and change tracks video files by pressing 4 gt Stop playback by pressing See page 224 for more information about playback and navigation on video DVDs and page 225 for information about playing video files Fast forward reverse Press and hold the m4 gt gt buttons to fast forward reverse Fast forward reverse can be done at several speeds for video files by briefly pressing these buttons to increase the speed Fast forward reverse is done at one speed for audio files Stop fast forward reverse by press ing 8 orthe 4 gt gt buttons Listening to the radio You can also listen to the infotainment sys tem s radio through the RSE system 1 Switch on the cordless headphones select CH A for the left screen or CH B for the right screen 2 Point the remote control toward a screen
228. he right of the INFO button on the center console See page 211 for the location of this button NAV Switch to the optional Volvo Nav igation system Select one of the infotainment RADIO system s radio wavebands AM FM1 etc 05 To control one of the rear RSE screens select L left R right using the remote s Le but ton Continue by pointing the remote at the selected screen s IR transceiver see the illus tration on page 245 for its location M Select one of the infotainment EDIA system s sources Disc USB etc l TEL Select the Bluetooth hands free To help avoid the risk of injuries in the event feature of sudden braking or a collision always stow loose objects such as the remote con trol cell phones cameras etc in the glove compartment or other storage compart ments when not in use Fast reverse change tracks EI songs CR Play pause The scroll wheel has the same function as TUNE in the center console control panel 4 Vehicles with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment system only 254 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment Remote control trips a Stop Fast forward change tracks songs One button access to frequently used functions which must be programmed into the button see page 211 DVD DVD menu INFO Information about the current MENU i film song etc or to display information not currently shown EXIT G
229. he vehicle s speed distance to the vehicle ahead 162 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode This may be due to e high brake temperature e the radar sensor is obstructed by heavy rain snow etc Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles See page 159 for information on the radar sensor s limitations Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning 04 required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Press Brake To hold an The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll The driver will have to apply the brakes The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal Below 20 mph Only follow This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx 18 mph 30 km h without a vehicle ing ahead within range approx 100 ft 30 meters i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 163 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 164 Distance Alert Introduction
230. hen the system has registered the driver s pronuncia tion no additional phrases will be displayed After completed voice training select User 1 or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys tem to the current user Voice output volume e A volume control will be displayed To set the volume level 1 Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel 2 Test the setting by pressing OK 3 Store the setting and leave the menu by pressing EXIT Voice POI list Edit list The navigation system has a large number of points of interest POIs A maximum of 30 POIs can be stored in this list The menu alternative Voice POI list is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 optional Volvo Navigation System Refer to the navigation system s manual for detailed infor mation MY CAR gt Settings Audio settings See page 204 for more information about the infotainment system MY CAR gt Settings gt Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment Normal High Low Recirculation timer Automatic rear defroster Interior air quality system Reset climate settings This feature returns the Climate settings menu to the original factory settings For more information about the climate sys tem see page 139 MY CAR gt Settings Favorites FAV See page 211 for more information about this feature MY CAR gt Settings Inf
231. hich may result in fogging on the windows Air distribution G043938 Manual air distribution defroster Manual air distribution dashboard air vents Manual air distribution floor The figure consists of three buttons When a button is pressed the corresponding figure will appear in the display with an arrow indicating which manual air flow has been selected see e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 143 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system S S the following illustration See also the air dis Blower speed in automatic mode can be set A C ON OFF tribution chart on page 146 under Climate settings gt Automatic blower When the indicator light in the adjustment Choose between Low Normal button is on the air condition or High AC ing is controlled automati cally This cools heats and dehumidifies the incoming air When the indicator light in the Selecting the lowest blower speed may button is off the air condition ing is disengaged Other functions are still con trolled automatically When maximum defroster is selected the air conditioning sys increases the risk of fog forming on the win dows WENYE 04 Temperature control tem is set for maximum blower speed and RUTO CLIMATE The temperatures on the dehumidification driver and passenger sides dist
232. hicle is covered under these conditions NHTSA can be reached at Internet http www nhtsa gov Telephone 1 888 DASH 2 DOT 1 888 327 4236 01 Safety 9 01 Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp Transport Canada can be contacted at 1 800 333 0510 Teletypewriter TTY 613 990 4500 Fax 1 819 994 3372 Mailing Address Transport Canada Road Safety 80 rue No l Gatineau Quebec J8Z 0A1 eee 9 01 Safety 01 18 Seat belts General information 6020995 Adjusting the seat belt Seat belts should always be worn by all occu pants of your vehicle Children should be prop erly restrained using an infant car or booster seat determined by age weight and height Volvo also believes no child should sit in the front seat of a vehicle Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts Seat belt pretensioners All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts These preten sioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy and in cer tain impacts from the rear The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which in the event of a collision limits the peak forces exerted by
233. hone is automatically disconnected from the infotainment system if it is moved out of range The cell phone can be manually disconnected from the hands free system by pressing and holding TEL or in phone mode going to Phone menu Disconnect phone See also page 236 for more information about connections The hands free system is also deactivated when the ignition is switched off or if the driver s door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive When the cell phone is disconnected from the hands free system a call in progress can be continued using the cell phone s own speaker and microphone Even if the cell phone has been disconnected manually some phones may reconnect auto matically to the most recently used hands free unit for example when a new call is initiated Handling calls Incoming calls Press OK MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to answer a call even if the infotainment system is cur rently in another mode e g RADIO or MEDIA Press EXIT to reject a call Automatic answer This function means that incoming calls will be answered automatically Activate or deactivate the function in the menu system under Phone menu Call options Auto answer Call settings While a call is in progress press OK MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to access the following functions 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05
234. hs The blade on the driver s side is longer 5 Move the right steering wheel lever up and than the one on the passenger side hold it for at least 1 second The wipers will then move to the vertical Service position on the windshield Service position The wipers can be returned to the normal posi tion by briefly switching on the ignition or by starting the engine Replacing the windshield wiper blades N Ro N ei o O Wiper blades in service position o N e A o O The wiper blades must be in the vertical serv With the wipers in the service position fold ice position for replacement washing or to lift out the wiper arm from the windshield them away from the windshield when e g Press the button on the wiper blade attach removing ice or snow To put them in this posi ment and pull the wiper blade straight out tion parallel with the wiper arm 1 While sitting in the driver s seat close the Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks driver s door into place 2 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot Check that the blade is securely in place 08 Put the ignition in mode II see page 82 1 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive gt gt 08 Maintenance and specifications Wiper blades and washer fluid Cleaning Filling washer fluid Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv ice life of the wiper blad
235. ice s playlist and to navigate in this list Press OK MENU to either select a sub folder or confirm a choice and begin playback Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc ture Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest level in the playlist 05 Infotainment AUX USB sockets 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment AUX USB sockets The buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad can also be used to change tracks files The following symbols are used in the display e Jd audio files e amp video files o Y folders When a file has been played the player will continue to play the rest of the files of the same type in the current folder When all of the files in the folder have been played the player will automatically go to the next folder unless 05 Repeat folder is activated and play the files in it The system automatically detects and changes settings if a device containing only audio or only video files is connected to the USB socket and will play these files However the system will not change settings if the device contains both audio and video files and will continue to play the current type of file Fast forward reverse Press and hold the Sri buttons to fast forward reverse This is done at one speed for audio files but several soeeds can be chosen 1 USB and iPod only 2 USB only for video files Press the buttons sev eral times to increase the speed Re
236. in progress volume for the infotainment system can be adjusted in the normal way with the infotainment system s VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad Infotainment system sound can be automati cally muted when a phone call is received in Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio media Ringing volume In phone mode go to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring volume and adjust the volume by turning VOL Save the setting by pressing EXIT Ringing tones The hands free system s integrated ringing tones can be selected in Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Ring signals gt Ring signal 1 etc The connected cell phone s ring tone may not be switched off when one of the hands free system s ringing tones is used If you prefer to use the connected cell phone s ring tone go to Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals gt Mobile phone ring signal More information about pairing and connecting cell phones A maximum of 10 cell phones can be paired with the hands free system Pairing only needs to be done once for each phone After pairing the cell phone no longer needs to be in sight or discoverable Only one cell phone can be actively connected to hands free at a time Automatic connection When the hands free system is active and the most recently connected cell phone is within range it is connected automatically
237. in the back seat and buckle them up Volvo has some very specific recommendations e Always wear your seat belt e Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which when used with a three point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents Volvo recommends that you do not dis connect the airbag system in your vehicle e Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained e Volvo recommends that ALL occupants adults and children shorter than 4 feet 7 inches 140 cm be seated in the back 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag e Drive safely Child restraint registration and recalls Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall To stay informed about child safety seat recalls be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints Child restraint recall information is readily avail able in both the U S and Canada For recall information in the U S call the U S Govern ment s Auto Safety Hotline at 1 800 424 9393 In Canada visit Transport Canada s Child Safety website at http www tc gc ca roadsafety childsafety menu htm S 01 Safety 01 Child restraint systems Child restraints Convertible seat Booster cushion Infant seat There are three m
238. in the cargo compart ment on the same side as the fuel filler door 2 Grasp the green cord with a handle Gently pull the cord straight rearward until the fuel filler door clicks open 06 During your trip Refueling Opening closing the fuel cap 1 CAUTION ege that Se damage the ree way catalytic converter D D D 2 pee ie E SL Me SES Do not park your vehicle over combustible E taniman off ER BEER I lithe materials such as grass or leaves which Aon ek er lesa Es ellas crcl e can come into contact with the hot exhaust Scour Tin We Uel SILC system and cause such materials to ignite e Avoid overfilling the fuel tank Do not under certain wind and weather condi Fuel vapor expands in hot weather Open the filler cap slowly After refueling close the fuel filler cap by turn ing it clockwise until it clicks into place press the handle on the filler nozzle more than one extra time Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow Overfilling could also cause damage to the emis sion control systems Emission controls Three way catalytic converter Keep your engine properly tuned Certain engine malfunctions particularly involving tions Excessive starter cranking in excess of one minute or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three way cata lytic converter or exhaust system over heating Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to t
239. inadvertently leaving the lane The Driver Alert System consists of two differ ent functions that can be switched on together or separately e Driver Alert Control DAC e Lane Departure Warning LDW see page 183 When one or both of the functions has been switched on it is in standby mode and is acti vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph 65 km h The function deactivates if the vehicle s speed goes under 37 mph 60 km h Both functions use a camera that is dependent on the road lane being clearly marked by pain ted lines on each side The Driver Alert System does not function in all situations and is designed to be a sup plementary aid It is not however intended to replace the driver s attention and judge ment Driver Alert Control DAC introduction G017332 This function is intended to alert the driver if his her driving becomes erratic such as if the driver is distracted or fatigued OLE The camera has certain limitations see page 159 A camera monitors the painted lines marking the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and compares the direction of the road with the driver s movements of the steering wheel The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly i Option accessory for more information see Introduction DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang ing driving pattern It is primarily intended to be used on main roads and is not meant
240. indow is defogged de iced auto matically if the vehicle is started in an outside temperature lower than 48 F 9 C Auto defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Automatic rear defroster See page 133 for a description of the menu system Interior rearview mirror Auto dim function An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from following traffic and automatically reduces glare in the mirror Operation G031611 Rearview mirror with compass The rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the vehicle is pointing Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations N north NE north east E east SE Southeast S South SW southwest W west and NW northwest The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode Il To switch the compass on off use a pen or similar object and press in the button on the underside of the mirror Calibration The compass may need to be calibrated if for example the vehicle is driven into a new mag netic zone The character C is shown in the mirror s display if calibration is necessary 1 Stop the vehicle in a large open area safely out of traffic and away from steel structures and high tension electrical wires 2 Start the vehicle For best results from calibration switch off all electrical equipment in the vehicle cli mate
241. information about Bluetooth media 1 Switch on the cordless headphones select CH A for the left screen or CH B for the right screen 2 Use the remote control s L button to select a screen L left rear screen F front screen or R right rear screen Point the remote control toward a screen s IR trans ceiver and press MEDIA one or more times to come to the desired source Disc USB AUX etc release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted 3 Insert a CD in the infotainment system s media player or connect an external device to the vehicle s USB AUX sockets or via Bluetooth Playback and navigating in playlists Navigate using the remote control s scroll wheel see the illustration on page 254 to select the desired playlist or folder structure Use d i to confirm the choice of a sub folder orto begin playing the selected track audio file Tracks audio files can also be played by press ing on the remote control and change tracks audio files by pressing 4 gt Stop playback by pressing See page 225 for more information about the media player Watching a video Video tracks files can be viewed via the vehi cle s media player or the USB socket For more information about the media player see page 225 or page 227 for information about the USB socket 1 Switch onthe cordless headphones select CH A for the left screen or CH B for the right screen 2 Use t
242. ing kit Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to the steering wheel hub where it will be Clearly visible to the driver Ensure that the on off switch is in posi tion O the O side of the switch should be pressed down Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation If contact occurs wash the affected area immediately with soap and water 4 Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle of sealing compound Do not break the seal on the bottle This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder 5 Screw the bottle into the bottle holder The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it securely in place and help prevent sealing compound leakage Once in place the bot tle cannot be unscrewed This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician 6 Remove the valve cap from the tire s infla tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys tem s hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand 7 Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12 volt socket in the vehicle 8 Start the vehicle s engine The vehicle s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain Therefore be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place or out doors before using the system 9 Start the tire sealing system s compressor by pressing the on off switch to position I e Ne
243. inment system and can be used at the same time as other infotainment features For example if a rear seat passenger is using A V AUX and headphones the driver and front seat passenger can still use the vehicle s radio or media player However only one disc can be played in the media player at a time You can G045297 listen to music from e g an iPod or from streaming audio files using the Bluetooth function The RSE system can be controlled from the front screen parental control Different media can be played or viewed from different sources on the various screens front center console and or the respective screens in the rear seat It is also possible to play or view media from the same source on one or more of the screens However it is not possible to play a film from USB while a CD or DVD is being played i i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment 05 kk 245 CS 05 Infotainment 05 246 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE CAUTION When transporting large objects in the rear seat be sure that there is adequate space between the object s and the RSE screens to help avoid scratching or damaging these screens If necessary cover the screens with a suit able material e The RSE screens and remote control may not function in very low or very high cabin temperatures They will become operable again after the climate control system has crea
244. inment system can be used l Laminated panoramic roof power windows 12 volt sockets navigation system climate sys tem blower ECC windshield wipers can be used lI The headlights taillights come on Warning indicator lights come on for 5 seconds All equip ment operates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster which only work when the engine is running 03 Your driving environment ED Ignition modes Starting and stopping the engine See page 112 for information on starting the engine and switching it off Emergency towing See page 282 for more information 03 Information Provided by grees D 03 Your driving environment 03 84 Front seats G032589 Lumbar support turn the control for firmer or softer lumbar support E Front rear adjustment lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your choice Raise lower front edge of seat cushion pump up down Ed Backrest tilt turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest O Raise lower the seat pump up down O Control panel for power seat WARNING e Do not adjust the seat while driving The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully In addition position the seat as far rear ward as comfort and control allow e Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting Folding the front seat backrest G043898 The front passenger seat backr
245. ion accessory for more information see Introduction kk 359 09 Specifications 09 Overview of information and warning symbols Description Description Description Information symbol Ti see text in information display doy O High beam indicator 76 KJ Adaptive Cruise Con 156 Collision Warning with 178 trol Distance Alert 162 Full Auto brake and 164 Pedestrian Detection Y GA Adaptive Cruise Con 156 trol 162 Driver Alert System 180 Left turn signal indica 76 tor Adaptive Cruise Con 156 trol Distance Alert 162 164 Active Bending Lights 93 ABL AC a WA Q Right turn signal indi cator A Canadian models Adaptive Cruise Con 156 trol Distance Alert 162 164 Fuel filler door arrow 76 indicates it is on right Other information symbols side of vehicle Description ME y Adaptive Cruise Con 156 Rain sensor 98 trol 162 Adaptive Cruise Con 156 Driver Alert System 181 trol 162 Radar sensor 159 Adaptive Cruise Con 156 trol 162 O Driver Alert System 183 J Zi Lane Departure Warn ai Adaptive Cruise Con 156 Cameras 176 ka ing SZ SS trol Distance Alert 162 164 Laser sensor SS Option accessory for more information see Introduction 00 111 Overview of information and warning symbols 09 09 Specifications Description Information symbols in the ceiling console D
246. ioning normally Water or mud can make the brake linings slippery resulting in delayed braking effect CAUTION Engine damage will occur if water is drawn into the air cleaner If the vehicle is driven through water deeper than 10 in 25 cm water may enter the differential and the transmis sion This reduces the oil s lubricating Capacity and may shorten the service life of these components Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary This could result in electrical malfunctions If the engine has been stopped while the vehicle is in water do not attempt to restart it Have the vehicle towed out of the water Engine and cooling system Under special conditions for example when driving in hilly terrain extreme heat or with heavy loads there is a risk that the engine and cooling system will overheat Proceed as fol lows to avoid overheating the engine Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long steep hills Do not turn the engine off immediately when stopping after a hard drive The cooling fan may start or continue to operate for up to 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of the grille when driving in hot weather con ditions Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain The oil temperature could become too high Conserving electrical curr
247. irm by pressing OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to the desired setting and press OK MENU 3 Change the setting by turning TUNE and confirm the change by pressing OK MENU Press OK MENU or EXIT to return to the screen settings list To return to the factory settings select Reset Compatible formats The media player can play a number of differ ent types of files and disc formats and is com patible with the formats listed in the following table Dual format double sided discs such as DVD Plus or CD DVD are thicker than nor mal discs and may not play in your infotain ment system If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3 tracks is played all MP3 tracks will be ignored Audio CD Audio mp3 wma formats aac m4a Video for CD Video DVD Video divx mats avi asf G031959 Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com partment between the front seats An auxiliary device such as an iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the audio system via one of the sockets in the center console storage compartment A device connected to the USB socket can be operated using the vehicle s infotainment system controls An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable batteries will also be charged if the device is connected to the USB socket if the vehicle s ignition is on or if the engine is running To connect a device 1 USB and iPod only 1 Press MEDIA several times to come to the desired source iPod USB
248. is located in the inte rior rearview mirror J NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects Side windows and laminated panoramic roof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti mally the side windows and the laminated panoramic roof should be closed Fog on the inside of the windows The defroster function should be used to remove fog or mist from the inside of the win dows Keeping the windows clean with a com mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting Temporary shut off of the air conditioning The air conditioning is momentarily disen gaged during full throttle acceleration or when driving uphill with a trailer This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature Ice and snow Always keep the air intake grille at the base of the windshield free of snow Climate system maintenance Special tools and equipment are required to maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system Work of this type should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech nician Refrigerant Volvo cares about the environment The air conditioning system in your car contains a CFC free refrigerant R134a This substance will not deplete the ozone layer The air condi tioning system contains 1 8 lbs 820 g of R134a The systems uses PAG oil Passenger compartment filter Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended interv
249. it easier to transport long objects e The left driver s side section can be folded down separately e The center section can be folded down separately e The right passenger s side section can only be folded down together with the cen ter section e All three sections can be folded down together CAUTION To help avoid damage to the upholstery there should be no objects on the rear seat and the seat belt should not be buckled when the backrest is folded down s 03 Your driving environment EN WARNING e When one or more sections of the back rest is returned to the upright position check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it The red indi cators should also not be visible 03 e Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position e Long loads should always be securely anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop Release and lower the center head restraint see page 87 if the center and or right section of the backrest is to be low ered The outboard head restraints fold down automatically e Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading unloading the vehicle Pull up the backrest release control on the e Place the transmission in the Park P respective section s K and fold the sec position to help prevent inadvertent tion s down A red indicator e shows movement of the gear selector that the
250. ith Volvo specifications The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv ice Records Information booklet many of which will positively affect your vehicle s emis sions should be performed as indicated It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emis sion maintenance be retained in case ques tions arise concerning maintenance Inspec tion and maintenance should also be per formed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Applicable warranties U S Canada In accordance with applicable U S and Cana dian regulations the following list of warranties is provided e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty e Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty EI Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys tems Limited Warranty e Emission Design and Defect Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty These are the federal warranties other warran ties are provided as required by state provin cial law Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each of the warranties Periodic maintenance helps minimize emissions Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi cle running well Your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet provides a com prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up to 150 000 miles 240 000 km of vehicle main tenance The schedule includes components that affect vehicle emissions This page desc
251. ith tar remover after the car has been washed e Astiff bristle brush and lukewarm soapy water can be used to clean the wiper blades Frequent cleaning of the wind shield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades e Wash off the dirt from the underside wheel housings fenders etc e In areas of high industrial fallout more fre quent washing is recommended When washing the car remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills OD CAUTION e During high pressure washing the spray mouthpiece must never be closer to the vehicle than 13 80 cm Do not spray into the locks e Dirt snow etc on the headlights can reduce lighting capacity considerably Clean the headlights regularly for example when refueling Special laminated panoramic roof cau tions e Always close the laminated panoramic roof and sun shade before washing your vehicle e Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the laminated panoramic roof e Never use wax on the rubber seals around the laminated panoramic roof Exterior components Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products available at your Volvo retailer for cleaning colored plastic rubber or ornamental components such as chromed strips on the exterior of your vehicle The instructions for using these products should be followed care fully Solvents or stain removers should not be
252. itivity used by the system The warning distance Long provides an earlier warning Begin by using Long and if the system gives too many warnings try changing to Normal WARNING e The setting Short should only be used in situations where traffic is light and moving at low speeds e Collision Warning alerts the driver to the risk of a collision but this function can not reduce the driver s reaction time e For Collision Warning to be as effective as possible it is recommended that Dis tance Alert be set to 4 or 5 see page 164 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction When Adaptive Cruise Control is used the warning light and signal will be used by that function even if the warnings provided by Collision Warning have been deactivated by the driver In situations where traffic is moving at considerably different speeds or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly warn ings may be considered to be late even if the setting Long has been selected Checking settings The current Collision Warning settings can be checked by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems gt Collision Warning Limitations Strong sunlight reflections extreme light con trasts the use of sunglasses or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see For
253. l N If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec onds irrespective of whether the engine is run ning then the gear selector is locked To be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in posi tion Il see page 82 Geartronic Sport mode S This transmission mode provides sportier shift ing Characteristics and enables a more active driving style by making it possible to drive at higher rpm in each gear before shifting up The engine also responds faster when the throttle pedal is pressed To access Sport mode from Drive D move the gear selector to the right The transmission will 2 Certain models only not switch to manual shifting mode until the gear selector is moved forward or rearward toward or Sport mode can be selected any time When the transmission is in Sport mode the transmission symbol in the main instrument panel will change from D to S see page 75 Please be aware that using Sport mode may result in a slight decrease in fuel economy Driving in D can help improve fuel economy Geartronic starting on slippery surfaces Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic s manual shift ing mode can help provide better traction when starting off on slippery surfaces To do so 1 Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector to the right from the D posi tion to the m
254. l angle at which the vehicle is leaning Using this infor mation RSC calculates the likelihood of a roll over If there is an imminent risk of a rollover the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys tem DSTC is activated power to the engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability For additional information on DSTC see page 149 WARNING The vehicle s stability systems including ROPS and RSC do not replace the driver s responsibility for operating the vehicle ma safe manner Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road traffic and weather conditions Posted speed limits should always be respected A E 9 01 Safety o function in the vehicle such as the fuel lines 2 Close the driver s door and reinsert the sensors for one of the safety systems the remote key in the ignition slot brake system etc 3 Try to start the vehicle WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed the vehicle should not be driven and must be towed Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to control e Never attempt to repair the vehicle yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode See manual This could result in Moving the vehicle injury or improper system function If the message Normal mode is displayed e Restoring the vehicle to normal operat when Safety mode Se
255. l function but con siderably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal and greater steering effort must be exerted e The towing eyelets must not be used for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck 06 gt gt 06 During your trip 06 Emergency towing Precautions when the vehicle is being towed e Attach jumper cables see page 114 to provide current for releasing the electric parking brake and to move the gear selec tor from the P position to N e Be sure that the steering wheel lock is released see page 90 e While the vehicle is being towed set the ignition in mode ll if the battery is not drained so that the headlights taillights can be switched on See page 82 for informa tion on the ignition modes e Maximum speed 50 mph 80 km h Do not exceed the maximum allowable towing speed e Maximum distance with front wheels on ground 50 miles 80 km e While the vehicle is being towed try to keep the tow rope taut at all times e The vehicle should only be towed in the forward direction CAUTION Vehicles with AWD All Wheel Drive with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at speeds above 50 mph 70 km h or for distances longer than 30 miles 50 km CAUTION e Please check with state and local authorities before attempting this type
256. l interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may Cause undesired operation The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla tion pressure levels When the vehicle is mov ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph 30 km h or faster these sensors transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located in the vehicle When low inflation pressure is detected TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning light UY also referred to as a telltale in the instrument panel and will display one of the following messages in the text window Tire pressure low or Tire needs air now 1 Not available in all markets or in all models If a fault occurs in TPMS the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and Tire press syst Service required will be displayed Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres
257. l lock settings can be made e Thechannel access code can be displayed or changed see also Locking a channel on page 221 e Your Sirius ID can be displayed e Reset Sirius settings Skip options This function is used to remove a channel from the list of available channels E a channel Press OK MENU 2 Scroll to the Advanced settings menu 3 Press OK MENU to enter the Skip options menu 4 Press OK MENU to enter Channel skip list 5 Press OK MENU to select All categories or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and press OK MENU to select it 6 Press OK MENU to select Skip all channels in the category or turn TUNE to scroll to a channel and press OK MENU to select or deselect it Multiple channels can be selected Unskip all channels This removes all channels from the skip list and makes them available for selection Temporary unskip all channels This function will temporarily unskip all chan nels and make them available for selection The channels remain on the skip list and will again 2 The default code is 0000 If you have changed the code and forgotten it see the section If you have forgotten the access code be skipped the next time the ignition is switched on Channel lock Access to specific channels can be restricted locked A locked channel will not provide audio song titles or artist information OLA All channels are initially unlocked Locking a channel 1 Press OK MENU 2
258. lder and lap belts are taut Unbuckling the seat belt To remove the seat belt press the red section on the seat belt receptacle Before exiting the vehicle check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled If necessary guide the belt back into the retractor slot Seat belt maintenance Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition Use water and a mild deter gent for cleaning Check seat belt mechanism function as follows attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm behind the back or otherwise out of position Such use could Cause injury in the event of an accident As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching they should be replaced after any collision even if they appear to be undamaged Never repair the belt yourself have this work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three point belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection avail able to you in the event of a collision The seat back should not be tilted too far back The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions backrests in the front passenger s seat We also recommend that children who h
259. le The safety wire should never be fastened to or wound around the drawbar ball Towing a trailer 06 During your trip When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P Always follow the trailer manufacturer s recom mendations for wheel chocking When starting on a hill put the gear selector in D before releasing the park ing brake See also page 123 for more detailed information about starting off on a hill while towing a trailer If you use the manual Geartronic shift positions while towing a trailer make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine using too high a gear The drawbar assembly trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow Please adhere to Volvo s recommended trailer weights Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15 Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle s trailer hitch has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground Detachable trailer hitch accessory o Ed Es o o O Ball holder 3 Locking bolt Cotter pin Hitch assembly OG Safety wire attachment Installing the ball holder 1 If necessary remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly 2 Slide the ball hold
260. learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the pro grammed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require trans mitter signals to time out or quit after sev eral seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficul ties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming pro i Option accessory for more information see Introduction cedures replace Programming HomeLink step 2 with the following e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle
261. lease it 03 several times If the problem persists contact an authorized Volvo workshop If you drive off with this error message showing a warning signal sounds Parking brake Service required A fault has occurred Try to apply and release Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill Introduction Normally when the accelerator pedal is released while driving down hills the vehicle s speed slows as the engine runs at lower rom the normal engine braking effect However if the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is carrying a load speed increases despite the engine braking effect In this situa tion the brakes must be applied to reduce the vehicle s speed HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and makes it possible to increase or decrease the vehicle s speed on downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal without applying the brakes The brake system functions auto matically to maintain a low and steady speed HDC is particularly useful when driving down steep hills with rough surfaces and where the road may have slippery patches HDC does not function in all situations and is a Supplementary braking aid The driver has full res
262. lease the button to return to normal viewing speed Scan This function plays the first ten seconds of each track audio file To start scanning 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Scan gt The first ten seconds of each track audio file will be played 3 Stop scanning by pressing EXIT The cur rent track audio file will continue playing Random This function plays the tracks in random order shuffle The random tracks sound files can be scrolled through in the normal way To listen to tracks in random order 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Random 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the random play function Press the buttons on the center con sole or steering wheel keypad to change tracks audio files Search The keypad in the center console can be used to search for a file in the currently selected folder Start the search by either turning TUNE to access the folders or by pressing one of the character keys to enter a letter number Pos sible search results will be displayed as char acters are entered Play the file by pressing OK MENU Repeat This function makes it possible to play files in a folder repeatedly When the last file has been played the first file will begin again To acti vate 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function External sound sources USB flash drive To simplify the use of a USB flash drive it i
263. lectronic Serial Number or ESN is required when contacting the Sirius Call Center It is used to activate your account and when mak ing any account transactions Selecting a channel category 1 Turn TUNE to display a list of channels 2 Press EXIT 3 Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of cat egories and press OK MENU to make a selection gt The channels in the selected category are displayed The category All is default which ena bles you to scroll through the entire list of available satellite channels The channel categories are automati cally updated several times a year This takes approximately two minutes and will interrupt normal broadcasting A message will be displayed while updat ing is in progress Information on chan nel or feature updates is available at www siriuS com Selecting a channel There are three ways of tuning in a channel Using the left and right arrow keys to go to the next channel Skipped channels see page 221 will be excluded By turning the TUNE control and selecting a channel from the list Through direct channel entry The numbers of skipped or locked channels will not be displayed If a channel is locked the access code must be entered before the channel can be selected See Unlocking a channel on page 221 Direct channel entry The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical order throughout all of the categories To access a Channel directly 1 Tu
264. left side of the display ir changes to sf the radar sen y ca sor has detected another vehicle ahead The distance to a vehicle ahead is only regulated when this symbol is illumi nated Changing the set speed After a speed has been set it can be increased or decreased by using the ck or buttons Each time one of these buttons is pressed the vehicle s speed changes by 5 mph approximately 8 km h When the system is in active mode the but ton has the same function as but results in a smaller increase in speed If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control buttons is pressed for more than approximately one minute ACC will be deactivated The engine must then be switched off and restarted to reset ACC In some situations Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be put in active mode Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display see page 162 Setting a time interval The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be increased by pressing and decreased by pressing el The current time interval is shown briefly in the display following adjustment Different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal bars The greater the number of bars the longer the time inter val One bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second 5 bars is approximately 2 5 seconds At low speeds when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short ACC incre
265. ll phone connected disconnect it from the hands free system 2 Make the vehicle discoverable via the Bluetooth function by pressing OK MENU and activating the menu selection Phone settings gt Discoverable 3 Perform a search with the cell phone s Bluetooth function see the cell phone s user s guide if necessary 4 Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices shown in the cell phone s display 5 When prompted enter a PIN code of your choice in the cell phone using the cell phone s keypad Enter the same PIN code in the infotainment system using the sys tem s keypad in the center console 6 Connect to My Volvo Car from the cell phone The cell phone will be paired registered and will be connected automatically to the infotain ment system For more information on pairing and connecting a cell phone see page 237 Making a call 1 Ensure that FE is shown at the top of the center console display and that the hands free function is in telephone mode 2 Dial the desired phone number using the center console keypad or use the speed dial function see page 240 In normal view see page 207 for information about the various display views It is also possi ble to turn TUNE clockwise to access the phone book and then counter clockwise for the call list See page 237 for more information about the phone book 3 Press OK MENU End or reject a call by pressing EXIT Disconnecting the cell phone The cell p
266. llows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened If your vehicle has been involved in a rear end collision the front seat back rests must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician even if the seats appear to be undam aged Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced Do not attempt to service any compo nent in the WHIPS system yourself G033194 01 Safety Whiplash Protection System WHIPS WARNING e Boxes suitcases etc wedged behind Any contact between the front seat back the front seats could impede the func rests and the folded rear seat or a rear fac tion of the WHIPS system ing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system If the rear seat is folded e If the rear seat backrests are folded down the occupied front seats must be down cargo must be secured to pre adjusted forward so that they do not touch vent it from sliding forward against the the folded rear seat front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear This could inter fere with the action of the WHIPS sys tem 01 Safety 9 Rollover Protection System ROPS 01 Volvo s Rollover Protection System utilizes the Roll Stability Control RSC function which is designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should occur RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the amount of change in the latera
267. llus tration This offers a quick way of changing modes RADIO MEDIA etc directly from the steering wheel keypad without taking your hands off the steering wheel This can also be done using the mode buttons on the center console control panel TEL Bluetooth hands free MY CAR Driving related settings CAM Park assist camera e Select a mode 1 by turning the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad Press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice e After selecting a mode turn the thumb wheel to one of the mode s alternatives in 208 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Getting started Standard steering wheel keypad Left right arrow keys A short press moves Thumb wheel used to scroll in the menus shown on the display Press the thumb wheel to e g confirm a menu selection or to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth connected cell phone Mute entered in the display A long press takes you to the main menu view see page 208 Thumb wheel used to scroll in the menus shown on the display Press the thumb wheel to e g confirm a menu selection or to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth connected cell phone Voice control for operating Bluetooth connected cell phones and the optional navigation system 05 Infotainment eh Se WEE 05 between preset radio stations or tracks on Headphones with an impedance of a disc Press and hold to search wi
268. locks will auto and unlocked using the detachable key blade key matically reengage re lock and the alarm will in the remote key See page 61 for information Press the tailgate unlock button on the as rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail on removing the key blade from the remote remote key to unlock but not open the gate has been opened key tailgate See also page 58 Automatic locking E gt Insert the key blade in the glove compart j W s Sch deeg E S Ee E Ae When the vehicle starts to move the doors and ment lock Ge a EE een S de tailgate can be locked automatically This fea e Sec Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise ture can be turned on or off by pressing MY e y g cie US AR EE ana nel f nation sensors will be automatically dis CAR and going to Car settings gt Lock E Remove the key blade from the lock See settings Automatic door locking See page 133 for a description of the menu sys Locking unlocking the tailgate tem e lf the doors are locked while the tailgate is open the tailgate will remain ea unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by y pressing the Lock button on the remote o key On keyless drive vehicles the gear selector must be in the Park P position all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be E switched off before the vehicle can be J locked Tailgate unlock button on the remote key 1 This button also opens but does not close the tailgate on models equippe
269. luid AW 1 Coolant 3 2 6 cyl 9 4 US ats 8 9 liters Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water 50 50 mix see 3 0T 9 4 US qts 8 9 liters packaging Air conditioning All models 1 7 lbs 770 g Refrigerant R134a HFC134a PAG oil Brake fluid 0 63 US ats 0 6 liters DOT 4 Power steering 1 26 US gts 1 2 liters Power steering fluid WSS M2C204 A2 or equivalent product Washer fluid 6 8 US qts 6 5 liters Use a washer antifreeze recom 4 7 US ats 4 5 liters mended by Volvo mixed with water Fuel tank volume 3 01 3 26 cyl 18 5 US gallons 70 liters A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life However it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions B Models without headlight washers 00 11 09 Specifications Electrical system 09 Specifications General information 12 volt system with a voltage regulated alter nator Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors The negative terminal is connected to the chassis Performance battery Engine 3 2 6 cyl 3 0T Voltage V 12 Cold start capacity A 520 700 Reserve capacity min 100 135 WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling CAUTION If the b
270. lvo s SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners front air bags side impact airbags a front passenger occupant weight sensor and inflatable cur tains All of these systems are monitored by the SRS control module An SRS warning light in the instrument panel see the illustration illu minates when the ignition is in modes I Il or 111 and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the sys tem Where applicable a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illumi nates If this warning symbol is not functioning Po Supplemental Restraint System SRS Restraint System SRS properly the general warning symbol illumi nates and a text message will be displayed See also page 76 and page 78 for more information about indicator and warning sym bols e If the SRS warning light stays on after the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible e Never try to repair any component or part of the SRS yourself Any interfer ence in the system could cause mal function and serious injury All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician If your vehicle has been subjected to flood conditions e g soaked carpeting standing water on the floor of the vehicle or if your vehicle has become flood damaged in any wa
271. mation e The turn signals will flash twice and the door mirrors will fold out Making a setting Different alternatives for locking unlocking confirmation can be selected in the menus by pressing MY CAR on the center console con trol panel e To activate visual confirmation go to Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and or Unlock confirmation light by pressing OK MENU e To activate audible confirmation go to Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings and select Audible confirmation by pressing OK MENU See page 133 for a description of the menu system Immobilizer start inhibitor Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a coded transponder The code in the key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot where it is compared to the code stored in the start inhibitor module The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key If you misplace a key take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprog ramming as an anti theft measure The follow ing messages which may appear in the instru ment panel display are related to the immobil izer e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade kk 3 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade Message Meaning Insert car key Remote key not rec ognized during start Try to star
272. mation see Introduction Be sure that the cargo net s upper attachment hooks are properly inserted inthe brackets and that the lower straps are correctly attached and pulled taut A damaged cargo net should never be used Objects in the cargo area should be securely anchored even if the cargo net is correctly installed and in use Mounting the cargo net The cargo net is easiest to put in place through one of the rear doors 1 Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the upper hinged rod is straight and locked in position Insert one end of the rod into the front or rear bracket near the ceiling Be sure that the lock on the lower strap is facing toward you Insert the other end of the rod in the oppo site bracket Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod as far forward as possible in the brackets Cargo net in rear position 4 Mounting in the rear position With the net s rod attached to the rear upper brackets hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in the cargo area Pull the net strap taut Cargo area Cargo net in front position Mounting in the front position With the net s rod attached to the front upper brack ets hook the lower straps in the eyelets in the front seat rails Attaching the net is eas ier if the front seat backrests are upright and the seats are moved slightly forward If the front seats are moved rearward they should not press hard against the net C
273. may be too low Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 320 If the level in the reservoir is below MIN the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked om Canadian models are equipped with this symbol If the BRAKE and ABS symbols come on at the same time there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine 2 Restart the engine e f both symbols extinguish continue driv ing e lf the symbols remain on check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 320 If the brake fluid level is normal but the sym bols are still lit the vehicle can be driven with great care to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked e Ifthe level in the reservoir is below MIN the vehicle should be transported to an author ized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked e If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window DO NOT DRIVE Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected e lf the ABS and Brake system lights are on at the same time there is a risk of reduced vehicle stability EA Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a problem related to safety and or drivability A
274. minate to help alert vehicles traveling behind The adaptive brake lights activate if ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment GE 03 kk MS GE 03 Your driving environment 03 Brakes e The ABS system activates for more than approximately a half second e Inthe event of sudden braking while the vehicle is moving at speeds above approx imately 6 mph 10 km h When the vehicle has come to a stop the brake lights and additional taillights remain on for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or until braking force on the vehicle is reduced Power brakes function only when the engine is running The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure which is only created when the engine is run ning Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the engine switched off If the power brakes are not working consider ably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal to compensate for the lack of power assistance This can happen for exam ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling The brake pedal feels harder than usual Water on brake discs and brake pads affects braking Driving in rain and slush or passing through an automatic car wash can cause water to collect on the brake discs and pads This will cause a delay in braking effect when the pedal is depressed To avoid such a delay when the brakes are needed depress th
275. mission con trol systems on your vehicle lead has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer If you live in an area where you must fill your own gas tank take precautions These may include e standing upwind away from the filler nozzle while refueling e refueling only at gas stations with vapor recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling e wearing neoprene gloves while handling a fuel filler nozzle Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months do not add solvents thicken ers or other store bought additives to your vehicle s fuel cooling or lubricating systems Overuse may damage your engine and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals Never carry a cell phone that is switched on while refueling your vehicle If the phone rings this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes resulting in fire and injury Carbon monoxide is a poisonous colorless and odorless gas It is present in all exhaust gases If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated and immediately return the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction 06 kk 267 06 During your trip
276. mits for the rack e Never exceed the rack manufacturer s weigh limits and never exceed the maxi mum rated roof load of 220 Ibs 100 kg e Avoid single point loads Distribute loads 06 evenly e Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load e Secure the cargo correctly with appropri ate tie down equipment e Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured e Remember that the vehicle s center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof 06 During your trip Cargo area Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger com partment Folding the grid up down Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it rearward upward or push it downward for ward If the steel grid is to be used with the optional cargo area cover the grid must be folded down before the cargo area cover is put in place 1 Assembly instruction no 30715972 Installing the steel cargo grid For information about the necessary tools and procedures for installing removing the steel cargo grid please refer to the assembly instructions that were included when the grid was purchased Use e Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars e To retract roll up the cover release it from the holes and guide it toward the rear seat backrest Installing the cover
277. mmended by Volvo See also the information beginning on page 344 Menu settings The default settings for four of the climate sys tem s functions can be changed in the menu system e Blower speed in automatic mode e Recirculation timer for passenger com partment air e Automatic rear window defrosting e The optional Interior Air Quality System IAQS The functions can also be returned to factory settings in the menu system See page 133 for a description of the menu system Air distribution E bd 6 Y Ki e O The incoming air is distributed from a number of different vents in the passenger compart ment Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode If desired air distribution can be controlled manually see page 146 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars Ge E Open EY Closed E Closed E Open e Horizontal airflow e Horizontal airflow D Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win Direct the outer air vents toward the side win dows to defrost dows to defrost Direct the vents into the passenger compart ment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 142 Climate system Electronic climate control ECC G043948 ap Temperature control driver s side Heated front passenger s seat Heated driver s seat 1
278. ms will make detection of misfueling easier pos sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis fueled vehicles Some U S and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methyl cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT If such fuels are used your Emission Control System performance may be affec ted and the Check Engine Light malfunc tion indicator light located on your instru ment panel may light If this occurs please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for service Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers Oxygenated fuels Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates which are usually alcohols or ethers In some areas state or local laws require that the service pump be marked indi cating use of alcohols or ethers However there are areas in which the pumps are unmarked If you are not sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy check with the service station operator To meet sea sonal air quality standards some areas require the use of oxygenated fuel Volvo allows the use of the following oxygen ated fuels however the octane ratings listed on page 267 must still be met Alcohol Ethanol Fuels containing up to 10 ethanol by volume may be used Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol or Gasohol Ethers MTBE Fuels containing up to 15 MTBE may be used Methanol Do not use gasolines
279. ms too dark brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel In order to function properly the camera lens should always be kept clean This is particularly important in bad weather Keep the lens free of dirt ice or snow Rear Park Assist Camera PAC Using PAC Activation WEE PAC is activated when the gear selector is moved to R if the system is selected in the MY CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM button in the center console See page 133 for a description of the menu system If the Volvo Navigation System VNS is in use PAC will automatically override the navigation system to show the camera s image on the screen instead of navigation information for as long as reverse gear is selected Zoom The camera can be useful when attaching a trailer Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer hitch and press this button again to return to the normal camera view With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch a guiding line showing the hitch s path toward the trailer will be projected This feature can be activated in the MY CAR menu see page 134 The guiding lines for the wheels see the following section Guiding lines and for the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same time If the camera shows an enlarged zoomed image turn TUNE counterclockwise or press EXIT CAM or OK to return to a normal view Deactivation Move the gear selector from R to another posi
280. must first be fully open before it will be possible to open the laminated panoramic roof When closing the laminated panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun shade can be closed Tilt position r G031429 Tilt position raised at the rear edge ED Open raise the rear edge of the front glass section by pressing the rear edge of the control upward pd Close by pulling the rear edge of the con trol downward and holding it until the lami nated panoramic roof has closed com pletely If the sun shade is completely closed it will open approximately 2 inches 5 cm when the i j R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN 03 kk 107 OI 03 Your driving environment Laminated panoramic roof laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position Wind blocker The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker that folds up when the moonroof is open 108 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNING e If you use HomeLink to open a garage Introduction Programming HomeLink door or gate be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion When programming a garage door Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned on or to the second accessories position for programming opener it i
281. n Seat with memory function G021134 Stored seat position Stored seat position Stored seat position ER Memory button Programming the memory Three different seating and door mirror posi tions can be stored in the driver seat s memory The following example explains how button 1 can be programmed Buttons 2 and 3 are programmed in the same way To program store a seat position and door mirror position in button 1 1 Move the seat and door mirrors to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls 2 Press and hold down the memory button 4 3 With the memory button depressed press button 1 briefly to store the current posi tion for the seat mirrors To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was pro grammed Press and hold down button 1 until the seat and mirrors stop moving As a safety precaution the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position F o i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN 03 kk 85 D 03 Your driving environment 03 86 Remote keyless entry system and the driver s seat and door mirrors The remote control transmitter also controls the position of the power driver s seat and door mirrors in the following way 1 Adjust the seat to your preferences
282. n Add device is displayed press OK MENU 3 Be sure the external device s Bluetooth function is turned on and that the device is discoverable See the device s user s guide if necessary 4 Press OK MENU gt The infotainment system will search for external devices that are in range which may take several minutes The Bluetooth names of the devices found will appear in the center console dis play 5 Select the device to be paired and press OK MENU 6 Using the external device s keypad enter the digits shown in the audio system s dis play and press the device s button used to confirm a choice The external device will be automatically paired and connected to the infotainment system Audio files can now be selected using the CIN buttons in the center console or on the steering wheel keypad Automatic connection When the Bluetooth function is active and the most recently paired device is within range it is automatically connected When the infotain ment system searches for the most recently paired device its name is shown in the display To connect another paired device press EXIT See the following section for information about switching to another device Switching to another device It is possible to switch among paired Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle To do so 1 Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK
283. n the engine is started There was a fault in the brake When the vehicle has been parked for system s ABS function when more than usual when the engine is WARNING started This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is EE If ABS and BRAKE come on at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system related message is shown in the information dis play DO NOT DRIVE Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv ice technician and have the brake system inspected OI 03 Your driving environment Parking brake Electric parking brake An electric parking brake has the same func tion as a manual parking brake Applying the electric parking brake e n an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control Braking will be interrupted when the accelerator pedal o 03 A faint sound from the parking brake s electric motor can be heard when the parking brake is being applied This sound can also be heard during the PUSH LOCK L 1 PULL RELEASE 4 E e i is depressed or the control is released An audible signal will sound during this procedure if the vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph 10 km h automatic function check of the parking brake Parking on a hill The brake pedal will move slightly when e Ifthe vehicle is pointing uphill turn the front
284. nables you to find stations when driving in areas where radio sta tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar To access this list 1 Select the desired waveband FM1 or FM2 2 Turn TUNE one step in either direction This displays the list of stations in the area The currently tuned station will be indi cated in the list by magnified text 3 Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station on the list e This list will only display the frequencies of the stations currently being received not a complete list of all radio frequen cies on the currently selected wave band If the signal from the currently tuned station is weak this may prevent the radio from updating the list of stations If this occurs press own While the list of stations is displayed to switch to manual tuning mode and select a sta tion If the list of stations is no longer displayed turn TUNE in either direction to display the list again and press INFO The list will disappear from the display after several seconds If the station list is no longer displayed turn TUNE in either direction and press oemen on the number key pad on the center console to switch to manual tuning or to switch back from manual tuning to the list of stations function Manual tuning By default the list of stations of the strongest stations in the area will be displayed when you turn TUNE see the preceding section List of stations While the
285. nced ORC This system is available on Canadian mod els only 04 Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm This mode is particularly suitable for long dis Chassis settings tance highway driving The indicator light in the Use the buttons in the center console to button will be on when this mode is selected change setting The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated the next time Sport the engine is started In this mode the vehicle s body sway is reduced during cornering and steering i response is more immediate The transmission SPeed dependent steering force shifts up at higher rom for sportier driving The Steering force increases with the speed of the indicator light in the button will be on to indi vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity cate that Sport mode has been selected At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking etc Advanced In this mode body sway in curves is minimal Steering torce can be changed under MY CAR and steering response is very direct Gear shift gt Car settings 3 Steering wheel force Option accessory for more information see Introduction 151 Operation This steering force level menu function can not be accessed when the vehicle is in Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Cruise control Operation J d ER ER ei Y an O Steering wheel moun
286. nd other windows have laminated glass E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Power door mirrors Door mirror controls Adjusting 1 Press the L button for the left door mirror or the R button for the right door mirror The light in the button comes on 2 Adjust the position with the joystick in the center 3 Press the L or R button again The light should no longer be on WARNING Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur ther away than they actually are Retractable power door mirrors The mirrors can be retracted for parking driving in narrow spaces 1 Press down the L and R buttons at the same time 2 Release them after approximately one sec ond The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons at the same time The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi tion Storing the position The mirror positions are stored in the key mem ory when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key When the vehicle is unlocked with the same remote control the mirrors and the driver s seat adopt the stored positions when the driver s door is opened The function can be activated deactivated in MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory gt Position of door mirrors and driver s seat in key See page 133 for a description of the menu system Tilting the door mirror
287. nd a sound may be audible from the ABS control module This is normal Fuel filler door Press the button on the light switch panel see the illustration on page 268 when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for ward An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks Fuel filler cap The fuel filler door located on the right rear quarter panel is connected to your vehicle s central locking system Points to keep in mind Do not export your Volvo to another coun try before investigating that country s applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements In some cases it may be dif ficult or impossible to comply with these requirements Modifications to the emis sion control system s may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U S Canada and other countries All information illustrations and specifica tions contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differ ently depending on special legal require ments Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all mar kets Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time or to change specifi cations or design without notice and with out incurring obligation Vehicle event data
288. nd messages in the display instrument panel may illuminate and its asso When City Safety automatically applies the ciated message will be displayed brakes one or more of the symbols in the main A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the READ button on the turn signal lever Meaning action required Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is applying has applied the brakes automatically 04 Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction blocked e Remove the obstruction and or clean the windshield in front of the sensor s For more information on the sensor s limitations see page 169 City Safety Service required City Safety is not functioning e If this message remains in the display have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 172 Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection Introduction Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian a vehicle ahead that is at a stand still or one that is moving in the same direction as your vehicle Collision Warning consists of the following three functions e Collision Warning warns the driver of a potential collision situation e Brake Support helps the driver brake effi ciently in a critical situ
289. ndicator lights Using the information button 1 Press the information button Fil kk e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 59 02 Locks and alarm 02 60 Remote key and key blade 2 All of the indicator lights will flash sequen tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi cate that the PCC is receiving information from the vehicle If any of the buttons are pressed during this 7 second period transmission of information to the PCC will be interrupted If none of the indicator lights flash when the information button has been pressed sev eral times from different places in relation to the vehicle contact an authorized Volvo service technician The indicator lights provide information according to the illustration t D o o E o Steady green light the vehicle is correctly locked 2 Steady yellow light the vehicle is not locked Steady red light the alarm has been trig gered O Both red lights flash alternatively the alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago Range The PCC s lock and unlock functions have a range of approximately 60 ft 20 m from the vehicle e The approach lighting panic alarm and the functions controlled by the informa tion button have a range of approxi mately 300 ft 100 m from the vehicle Radio waves buildings or other obsta cles may interfere with the function of the PCC If the vehicle does not
290. nes while backing up e Mark Distance information to display the intersecting lines while backing up Activating the system e Mark Automatic to activate PAC each time reverse gear is selected e Mark Off to turn off PAC completely Summary e The camera is activated when the gear selector is moved to R this can be changed in the MY CAR menu and the image is shown on the center console dis play e When backing up two solid lines are pro jected on the screen to show the path that the vehicle s rear wheels will take These lines are affected by movements of the steering wheel The vehicle s approximate outer dimension are shown by two dashed lines e The graphic lines will not be displayed when backing up with a trailer that is con nected to the vehicle s electrical system e Objects on the ground that are closer than 1 ft 30 centimeters cannot be detected by the camera e The camera is active for approx 5 seconds after the gear selector is moved to R or until the vehicle s soeed exceeds 6 mph 10 km h e The optional Park Assist sensors and the parking camera work together and infor mation from the sensors is shown graphi cally on the display e The graphic lines shown on the screen when the vehicle backs up can be disabled in the settings menu e Manual zoom can be selected in the MY CAR menu e The system can be switched off by press ing CAM By default the system is acti vated when the gear s
291. ngs gt Car settings gt Driver support systems City Safety Select Off If the engine is switched off City Safety will reactivate when the engine is restarted WARNING The laser sensor emits light when the igni tion is in mode II or higher even if City Safety has been switched off To switch City Safety on again e Follow the same procedure as for switch ing City Safety off but select ON Limitations The sensor used by City Safety is designed to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark ness However there are certain limitations and the laser sensor s function may be reduced by for example heavy rain or snowfall or by dense fog or thick blowing dust or snow Condensa tion dirt ice or snow on the windshield may also interfere with the sensor s function Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor s function Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa ses on slippery road surfaces which may reduce City Safety s capacity to avoid a colli sion In situations like this the DSTC system see page 149 will help provide the best pos sible braking capacity and stability City Safety emits infrared light and measures the way in which the light is reflected
292. ning your vehicle please use genuine Volvo car care products All Volvo car care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly Recycling As part of Volvo s commitment to the environ ment it is essential for the vehicle to be recy cled in an environmentally sound way Almost the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that reason the vehicle s final owner is requested to contact a Volvo retailer for information about approved and certified recycling facilities Important warnings Driver distraction A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth ers sharing the roadway Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment Your new Volvo is or can be equipped with many fea ture rich entertainment and communication systems These include hands free cellular tel ephones navigation systems and multipur pose audio systems You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own con venience When used properly and safely they enrich the driving experience Improperly used any of these could cause a distraction For all of these systems we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Volvo concern for your safety Never use these devi ces or any feature
293. nsideration the volume level radio reception and the speed of the vehicle The settings that are described in this manual Bass Treble Equalizer etc are only ntfarmatir v Drettel ed h Yormation H l CS 05 Infotainment General functions LG vu 2 ABC 3 DEF al ae sw 6 woll MN a e L ka Ka L 7 Pars 8 tuv swxyz gt gt I a WI U ie wt 1 RADIO button for selecting the AM FM1 05 FM2 Sirius1 or Sirius2 wavebands EN Number key buttons 0 9 Navigate among the menu alternatives in the display by turning TUNE O Confirm your selection or access the radio menus by pressing OK MENU Left right arrow keys Press and hold to go to the next previous strong station press briefly to tune to a preset station RADIO menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system Selecting a station in wavebands AM FM1 FM2 Automatic tuning 1 Press RADIO Continue pressing this but ton to toggle to the desired waveband AM ENT etc 2 Release the button and wait several sec onds or press OK MENU 3 Press the left or right arrow keys on the center console control panel to search for the next available station List of stations in wavebands FM1 FM2 only The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals are cur rently being received This e
294. nt for a punctured tire It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire Road holding and handling may be affected with the Temporary Spare in use Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h OD CAUTION The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire 07 other than the one that came with the vehi cle The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car s transmission 4 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system 07 300 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System Location Introduction Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing system that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re inflate a flat tire or to adjust a tire s inflation pressure The system consists of an air compressor a container for the sealing compound wiring to connect the system to the vehicle s electrical system via one of the 12 volt sockets and a hose used to connect the system to the tire s inflation valve The 12 volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat and in the cargo area see page 200 Accessing the tire sealing system The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor of the cargo area To access it 1 Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area 2 Lift out the tire sealing system The tire sealing system is only intended to seal holes on the tire s t
295. o 218 SHOW e 298 HEES 298 DOANE TG AA E T 299 Speed dependent steerimg 151 SPIN CONO EE 149 OO vont erie ETE A EEE NE E AAA 21 Stability SEET te giegegeeretteret gtt 149 150 Engine Drag Control EDO 149 Intlicator NO EE 17 Starting the engine 112 with keyless drive 112 Starting the vehicle after a crash crash mode 36 Start inhibitor immobilizer 57 Steel grid in Cargo area 275 Steering wheel AA Elia q 0 AAPP 90 PP 91 KEY DAG E E 90 133 209 Lockmng unlocking 90 Stone chips touching up 345 Storage stpaces nne 198 Studded Kl 298 Sunroof laminated panoramic roof 106 Supplemental restraint system 21 eier nd 78 Symbols Overvlew nnne 359 T Tailgate driving with open 262 lOCKING UNMIOCKING secciones 67 power Operated oocccccccncccocccconoconononos 271 wiDer washer 99 Tailgate WIDE curas 330 Taillights changing bulbs 326 Temporary spare Ure 299 Three way catalytic converter 269 Tire designations e 292 Tire inflation Dressure 291 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 309 310 ICI CATOF TO E 77 Eeer A NEAT 286 EE 286 changing from summer to winter 287 glossary Of Fett 2ugereektet tegs eeeeet 294 improving GCOnOm 286 inflation GDressure 289 inflation pressure table 291 o AA 290 ROTA ON EEN 287 AOAN AAA eE EE ieee conse 298 Eege 299 SPECIFICATIONS
296. o Phone menu gt Phone book gt Search 1 Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK MENU to confirm The number letter keys on the center console can also be used 2 Continue to the next letter etc The results of the search will be displayed in the phone book 3 Bluetooth hands free connection 3 To switch from letter entry mode to the entry mode for numbers or special charac ters or to go to the phone book turn TUNE to one of the selections See the explanation in the following table in the list for switching character entry mode 2 and press OK MENU Character entry modes 123 Toggle between letters and num ABC bers by pressing OK MENU More Switch to special characters by pressing OK MENU gt This leads to the phone book 8 Turn TUNE to select a contact and press OK MENU to display the contact s information Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char acters that have been entered If a number button on the center console is pressed while the text wheel is displayed a list of characters 1 will be displayed Briefly press the button once to enter its first letter twice to enter the second letter etc Continue to press the button to display other characters Con tinue with the next character etc To enter a number press and hold the button Adding a new contact Enter the name of a new contact CD Switch between character en
297. o back one step in a menu can on the screen cel a function or delete entered characters ER Select language for audio tracks G043863 A Navigate up down y 5 S O Subtitles select subtitle lan guage 1 Press down on the battery cover and slide 05 it in the direction indicated in the illustra tion a p Navigate right left ll Not in use es SN SE SE tome 2 Remove the old batteries and insert new pic Replacing batteries ones in the directions indicated by the q Reduce volume The remote control runs on four AA LR6 bat symbols in the battery holder teries 3 Slide the cover back into place Increase volume Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner 0 9 Use to select preset channels or The batteries normal service life ranges from 1 4 years depending on how often the enter characters remote is used If the remote is not working properly try replacing the four AA LR6 bat teries i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 255 CS 05 Infotainment 05 Infotainment system menus Navigating in the menus Infotainment settings are made via the sys tem s menus Press one of the mode buttons RADIO MEDIA or TEL see the illustration on page 206 to select it and access its specific menus When a mode has been selected press OK MENU to access its menus Menu selections can be made using the con trols in the center console and certain func
298. o cause cancer and reproductive harm from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes Wash hands after handling before disconnecting the battery so that all 08 Installation 1 Lower the battery into the battery box 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Replacing fuses There are relay fuse boxes located in the engine compartment the passenger compart ment and the cargo area If an electrical component fails to function this may be due to a blown fuse The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it To do so 1 Pullthe fuse straight out If a fuse is difficult to remove a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine com partment fuse box cover 2 From the side examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact If the wire is broken insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage written on the fuse If fuses burn out repeatedly have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the follow ing pages Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle s electrical system Location of the fuse boxes ei N be 10 2 ei O Engine compartment 2 Under the glove compartment Under the glove compartment Cargo area 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 Maintenance and specifications 0
299. oads Therefore engine coolant temperature should be closely watched when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain Use a lower gear and turn off the air con ditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range If the automatic transmission begins to overheat a message will be displayed in the text window Avoid overload and other abusive opera tion Hauling a trailer affects handling durabil ity and economy It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe stop check and observe state local regulations Do not connect the trailer s brake system directly to the vehicle s brake system More frequent vehicle maintenance is required Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not being used Volvo recommends the use of synthetic engine oil when towing a trailer over long distances or in mountainous areas Bumper attached trailer hitches must not be used on Volvos nor should safety chains be attached to the bumper Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle rear axle must not be used Never connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle brake system nor a trailer s lighting system directly to the vehicle lighting system Consult your nearest author ized Volvo retailer for correct installa tion When towing a trailer the trailer s safety wire must be correctly fastened to the hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch on the vehic
300. ob counterclockwise OD CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing Replacing the sealing compound container The sealing compound container must be replaced if e the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire e the container s expiration date has passed see the date on decal After use the sealing compound bottle the hose and certain other system components must be replaced Please consult your Volvo retailer for replace ment parts If the sealing compound bottle s expi ration date has passed please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful substances Inflating tires The tire sealing system can be used to inflate the tires To do so 1 Park the car in a safe place 2 The compressor should be switched off Ensure that the on off switch is in position 0 the O side of the switch should be pressed down Take out the electrical wire and hose Remove the valve cap from the tire s infla tion valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand 5 Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12 volt socket in the vehicle 6 Start the vehicle s engine e The vehicle s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used
301. ocking fuel filler 10 17 Infotainment system Sirius 10 peace door satellite radio ive Tailgate window washer 1 BH Infotainment system 15 29 Gielen Geh gt O S dp Windshield washer 15 Bluetooth hands free sys 5 gi Active chassis system 10 tem Tailgate unlock 10 20 Rear Seat Entertainment T5 Positions fuse box B 10 f 10 stom PSE Pos Function TTT Laminated panoramic roof 5 Tailgate wiper 15 Fuel pump 20 Courtesy lighting climate Climate system control 5 system sensor a j panel 12 volt sockets 15 E Front courtesy lighting 7 5 Alarm movement sensor driver s door power win 23 Heated rear seat pas 15 dow controls power 15 E senger s side seat s HomeLink Wire dP Alarm On board diagnos 5 Gi Heated rear seat driver s 15 eee CM ete tic system ue side ER Instrument panel informa 5 O tion display kk w Option accessory for more information see Introduction 339 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 340 Airbag system occupant 10 weight sensor Collision warning system 5 e Accelerator pedal auto eo dim mirror function heated rear seats Brake lights 5 Laminated panoramic roof 20 Immobilizer 5 A e e i i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and specifications Cargo area
302. of towing as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maxi mum towing speed length and type of towing device lighting etc e If the vehicle s battery is dead do not attempt to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it as this will damage the three way catalytic converter s The engine must be jump started using an auxiliary battery see page 114 e Ifthe vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed Consult the tow truck operator Towing vehicles with front wheel drive All Wheel Drive Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip ment e If wheel lift equipment must be used please use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the vehicle In this case the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible e If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehi cle with the front wheels on the ground please refer to the towing information on page 281 OD CAUTION Sling type equipment applied at the front will damage radiator and air con ditioning lines It is equally important not to use sling type equipment at the rear or apply lift ing equipment inside the rear wheels serious damage to the rear axle may result If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat bed Consult the tow
303. ollow your child seat manufac sanas els oniy Treier to Use wri turer s installation instructions and use child seats positioned in the outboard To access the anchors both ISOFIX LATCH lower anchors and seating positions These anchors are 1 Put the child restraint in position top tethers whenever possible not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center 2 Kneel on the child restraint to press down seating position When securing a child the seat cushion and locate the anchors by restraint in the center seating position feel use only the vehicle s center seat belt o S 01 Safety 01 Top tether anchors WARNING e Never route a top tether strap over the Refer also to the child seat manufacturer s instructions for information on securing the child seat Child restraint anchorages AS E ES o bel e jo Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top tether anchorages in the rear seat They are located on the rear side of the backrests Securing a child seat 1P Ls d ee E Place the child restraint on the rear seat Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO FIX LATCH anchors If the child restraint is not equipped with lower tether straps or the restraint is used in the center seating position follow instructions for securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Ret
304. on optimally the BLIS camera lenses must be kept clean They can be wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge CAUTION e Clean the lenses carefully to avoid scratching e The lenses are electrically heated to help melt ice or snow If necessary gen tly brush away snow from the lenses Switching BLIS on and off ee z r co LO N bd Es o 0 BLIS is automatically activated when the igni tion is switched on The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times e The system can be switched off by press ing the BLIS button in the center console see the illustration The indicator light in the button goes out when the system is iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction switched off and a text message is dis played e BLIS can be switched on again by pressing the button The indicator light in the button will illuminate and a new text message will be displayed Press the READ button see page 131 to erase the message Depending on the vehicle s optional equip ment there may not be space for the BLIS but ton in the center console In this case BLIS can be switched on and off in the menu system by pressing MY CAR and going to Settings gt Car settings gt BLIS See page 134 for a description of the menu system BLIS system messages Text in the dis System status play Blind spot syst BLIS not functioning Service required properly Contact an authoriz
305. on that potentially may need correcting When this happens please have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv ice technician as soon as possible A malfunction indicator CHECK ENGINE light may have many causes Sometimes you may not notice a change in your car s behavior Even so an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy emission controls and drivabil ity Extended driving without correcting the cause could even damage other components in your vehicle This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine was running while the vehicle was refueled E Canadian models are equipped with this symbol NES Anti lock Brake System ABS warning light If the warning light comes on there may be a malfunction in the ABS system the standard braking system will still function Check the system by 1 Stopping in a safe place and switching off the ignition Restart the engine If the warning light goes off no further action is required If the warning light remains on the vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection see page 119 for additional information Canadian models are equipped with this symbol Rear fog light This symbol indicates that the rear fog light located in the driver s side tail light cluster is on Stability system This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC Dynamic Stability and T
306. onds resets an active trip odometer to zero The distance is shown in the display N o 10 Es E o O Clock and setting control Display yy Control for setting the clock Turn the control clockwise counterclockwise to set the time The set time is shown in the information display The clock may be temporarily replaced by a symbol in conjunction with a message see page 131 Setting the clock in MY CAR In addition to setting the clock manually as described above it can also be set in the MY CAR menu system See page 133 for addi tional information about these menus Time 10 03 AM OK o e o Y E f 1 Go to Settings gt System options gt Time 2 The hour box will be selected Press OK to activate this box r Instruments and controls 3 Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK to confirm the setting and deac tivate this box 4 Turn TUNE to select the minute box A and press OK to activate this box B 5 Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK to confirm the setting and deac tivate this box 6 Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to complete the procedure Use the menu selection Settings gt System options gt Time format to display the time in the 24 hour format or the 12 hour format AM PM 03 Your driving environment OI 03 D 03 Your driving environment 03 82 Ignition modes Inserting and removing the remote key G045
307. ong flash of the turn signals will con firm that the alarm is armed Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in MY CAR under Car settings gt Lock settings Keyless entry See page 133 for a description of the menu system USA FCC ID MAYDA 5823 3 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following con ditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Canada IC 4405A DA 5823 3 Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device 02 Locks and alarm 02 kk AA i 02 Locks and alarm 02 aooo goaa Disarming the alarm Press the Unlock button on the remote key gt Two short flashes from the car s direc tion indicators confirm that the alarm has been deactivated and that all doors are unlocked Turning off stopping the alarm If the alarm is sounding it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot Two short flashes from the car s direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been turned off Other alarm related functions Automatic re arming If the
308. ons Controls in the center console for basic infotain ment functions 1 SOUND press this button to access the menu for adjusting bass treble etc See page 212 for additional information E VOL Turn to raise or lower the volume level Short press switch the system ON Press and hold switch the system OFF A short press when the infotainment system is on will mute unmute the infotainment system sound O Number key pad used to e g select a pre set radio station enter letter numbers when using a Bluetooth cell phone etc O TUNE Turn in either direction to manually tune a radio station or navigate among the menu alternatives shown on the display O OK MENU Press to confirm a selection or access the menus for the currently selected infotainment system mode you can also choose to wait several seconds to automatically accept your selection Q EXIT Go higher in the menu system inter rupt the current function reject an incom ing phone call or erase any characters entered in the display From the highest level in the current menu press and hold to go to the infotainment system s main menu view see page 208 CH INFO Press this button to display addi tional information about a function song etc See page 211 for more information FAV This button can be used to store a shortcut to a commonly used function in AM FM SIRIUS DISC etc See the sec tion FAV storing a shortcut on page 211 for
309. ons that the driver must be aware of before using this feature This system is designed to be a supple mentary driving aid It is not however intended to replace the driver s atten tion and judgement The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe dis tance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not main tain a suitable speed or suitable dis tance to the vehicle ahead Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician Function Function overview ap Warning light braking by driver required 2 Controls in steering wheel Radar sensor in front grille Adaptive Cruise Control consists of e A cruise control system to maintain a set speed e Asystem to maintain a set distance to the vehicle ahead which is expressed as a time interval For example you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead The actual distance required to maintain a 2 second interval will vary according the speed of the vehi cles Adaptive Cruise Control ACC e Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli sion avoidance system The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles It also does not react to slow moving parked or approaching vehicles or sta tionary objec
310. ontrol setting The vehicle will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx 1 minute cruise control is disengaged The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control Automatic deactivation Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs If the speed drops below approximately 20 mph 30 km h When the brake pedal is depressed If the gear selector is moved to position N 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co e During wheel spin or wheel lock up WARNING e Ifthe vehicle s speed is increased by using the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads Cruise control may not maintain set The currently set speed will be saved in the speed on steep downgrades system s memory Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0 The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information display 04 Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated tempo rarily H can be reactivated by pressing D The vehicle s speed returns to the most recently set speed WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the O button has been pressed Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged by p
311. or AUX Release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK MENU gt For example if a USB device has been selected the text Connect USB will be displayed 2 Connect the device to one of the sockets in the center console storage compartment see the illustration The text Reading USB will be displayed while the system reads the device s folders This may take a short time depending on the folder structure and the number of files When this information has been loaded track information will be displayed and a track can be selected Tracks can be selected in two ways e Turn TUNE and press OK MENU e Use the right or left arrow keys IER on the center console control panel or on the steering wheel keypad e The system supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later In order to help avoid damage to the USB socket it will be switched off if there is a short circuit or if the con nected device uses too much current which can happen if the device does not comply with the USB standard The USB socket will reactivate the next time the ignition is switched on if the problem no longer exists If the problem persists contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician MEDIA menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system Navigating and playing tracks Turn TUNE to access the dev
312. or by pressing the button KA The windshield wipers will make one sweep Press the lever up for the wipers to make an extra sweep The rain sensor returns to active mode when the stalk is released back to posi tion 0 Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but ton or press the lever down to another wiper position 03 Your driving environment E Wipers and washers The rain sensor is automatically deactivated After the lever is released the wipers make sev Tailgate wiper washer when the key is removed from the ignition slot eral extra Sweeps eege or five minutes after the ignition has been switched off Heated washer nozzles The washer nozzles are heated automatically O CAUTION in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid l l from freezing 03 The rain sensor should be deactivated when washing the car in an automatic car wash High pressure headlight washing etc If the rain sensor function is left on the High pressure headlight washing consumes a wipers will start inadvertently in the car large quantity of washer fluid To save fluid the EE ER headlights are washed using two alternatives z f e Low high beam headlights on The head i ur Windshield washin SE SS ee done Wi EENEG Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer shield is washed Thereafter the head _ lights will only be washed once for every Intermittent wiping five times the windshield is
313. ormation Number of keys See page 56 for more information VIN number See page 351 for more information DivX VOD code See page 226 for more information Bluetooth software version in car See page 232 for more information Map and software version Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System manual for more information Climate system Introduction Air conditioning The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate Control ECC The climate control system cools heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas senger compartment The air conditioning can be switched off but to ensure the best possible cli mate comfort in the passenger com partment and to prevent the windows from misting it should always be on In warm weather a small amount of water may accumulate under the car when it has been parked This water is condensation from the A C system and is normal Sensor location e The sunlight sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard The sunlight sensor monitors which side of the car that is most exposed to sunlight This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left side air vents even if the temperatures set for both sides of the passenger compartment are the same e The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel e The outside ambient temperature sensor is located on the door mirror e The humidity sensor
314. orporation They are the developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel which refers to the method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast signal centered on the same fre quency as the AM or FM station s present fre quency The IBOC system is referred to as a hybrid since it is both analogue and digital During hybrid operation receivers still continue to receive the analogue non digital signal HD radio receivers incorporate both modes of reception where the receiver will automatically switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver When you have tuned to an HD Radio station the H symbol will appear in the audio sys tem display The symbol is grayed out when HD Radio is in standby mode and white when the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast More information about HD radio and IBOC can be found on Ibiquity s website www hdradio com and www ibiquity com Benefits of digital broadcasting e Better sound FM sounds near CD quality and AM as analogue FM e Some FM frequencies offer a greater num ber of listening choices through multicast ing consisting of a frequency s main channel and any sub channels that may also be available on that particular fre quency See also the section Sub chan nels below e When receiving a digital signal there is no multipath disturbance or hisses pops crackling due to outside influen
315. ory for more information see Introduction SE SS YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT Information Provided by Y ep AN A ee D 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 Ed ei 10 KE o o 74 03 Your driving environment EN Instruments and controls In 690 Gei O Menus and mes sages turn signals high low beams trip Computer Cruise control Horn airbag Main instrument panel Audio system Blue tooth hands free controls START STOP ENGINE button Ignition slot Infotainment menu display Door handle 139 95 92 147 152 hl 13 204 233 82 82 tege G e ee GS e 8 8 In door control pan els power win dows mirrors power child safety locks central lock ing button Hazard warning flashers Audio system con trols Climate system controls Gear selector Controls for active chassis Four C Wipers and washers Steering wheel adjustment Hood opening con trol Parking brake 101 103 52 66 94 204 142 116 15 98 99 90 317 122 ERC Lighting panel con 92 268 trols for opening 67 fuel filler door tail gate P4 Power seat adjust 84 ment controls Information displays G044558 Information displays in the instrument panel The information displays show information on some of the vehicle s functions such as cruise control the trip computer and messages
316. ow level markings of 1 5 bars where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving A high number of bars indicates stable driving If the vehicle is being driven erratically the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message Driver Alert Time for a break is displayed The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the same WARNING An alert should be taken seriously since it is sometimes difficult for a driver to realize that he she is fatigued In the event of a warning or if the driver feels fatigued stop as soon as possible in a safe place and rest e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 181 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System Symbols and messages in the display Driver Alert OFF Driver Alert Standby lt 40 mph Driver Alert Standby lt 65 km h Driver Alert Unavailable 04 Driver Alert Driver Alert Time for a break Windscreen Sensors blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required The function is not switched on The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle s speed is below 40 mph 65 km h The road lacks clear marker lines The function is analyzing the driver s driving pattern The number of bars varies from 1 5 where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving A high number of bars indicates stable driving The vehicle
317. oxi mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started the SRS system s diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre tensioner a front airbag side impact airbag and or an inflatable curtain Have the system s inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible See page 21 for more information about the airbag system Instruments and controls MN Seat belt reminder This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec onds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt Me Generator not charging This symbol comes on during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system Contact an authorized Volvo workshop Engine temperature Engine overheating can result from low oil or coolant levels towing or hard driving at high heat and altitude or mechanical malfunction Engine overheating will be signaled with text and a red warning triangle in the middle of the instrument display The exact text will depend on the degree of overheating It may range from High engine temp Reduce speed to High engine temp Stop engine If appropriate other messages such as Coolant level low Stop safely will also be displayed If your engine does overheat so that you must stop the engine always allow the engine to cool before attempting to check oil and coolant levels See page 320 for more information IN Fault in brake system If this symbol lights the brake fluid level
318. panel Symbol Message Description DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature DSTC reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly e Stop the vehicle in a safe place turn off the engine and restart it e Ifthe message is still displayed when the engine has restarted drive to an authorized Volvo work shop to have the system inspected 04 D Message Read the message in the information display and Steady glow for 2 secs The system is performing a self diagnostic test Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and or a skid Sport mode has been activated SPORT The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety It supplements but can never replace the driver s judgment and responsibility when operating the vehi cle Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Active chassis Four C ing is done at high rpm in each gear for Select Low Medium or High For a descrip Active chassis Four C Continuously Con dynamic and active driving tion of the menu system see page 133 trolled Chassis Concept regulates the cha racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car s driving characteristics can be adjusted There are three settings Comfort Sport and Adva
319. pant s back must be as upright 306534 seat back with the seat belt properly fastened Volvo s front airbags use special sen sors that are integrated with the front Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors seat buckles The point at which the air bag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used as well as the severity of the collision e Feet must be on the floor e g not on the dash seat or out of the window A gt a ee ee eg he Se H P Pm cb ige dy Eege T ea a Seng ge By Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys If the impact is less severe but severe enough to present a clear injury risk the airbags are trig gered at partial capacity If the impact is more severe the airbags are triggered at full capacity Et aj Fer ge en u mma een br MA H ee E Pa Kaf n O PEN E fg En gg KU EE eee Pe T iee a r G044294 Passenger s side airbag decal 2 A ee 01 Safety 9 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 01 WARNING No objects or accessory equipment e g dashboard covers may be placed on attached to or installed near the air bag hatch the area above the glove compartment or the area affected by airbag deployment see the illustration on page 22 There should be no loose articles such as coffee cups on the floor seat or dashboard area Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger s side dash
320. pear in the informa tion display in the instrument panel If this occurs clean the camera lenses If necessary the system can be temporarily switched off for instructions see page 196 G021427 Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A approx 31 ft 9 5 meters Distance B approx 10 ft 3 meters When does BLIS function The system functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph 10 km h When you pass another vehicle The system reacts when you pass another vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph 10 km h faster than that vehicle When you are passed by another vehicle The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph 70 km h faster than your vehicle WARNING e BLIS does not function in sharp curves e BLIS does not function when your vehi cle is backing up e lf you are towing a wide trailer this may prevent the BLIS cameras from detect ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes How BLIS functions in daylight and darkness Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi cles The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars trucks buses motorcycles etc Darkness BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles In order to be detected by BLIS a vehicle in the blind area must have its head lights on This means for example that the system will not detect a trailer without head lights that is being towed behind
321. peed is below approximately 2 mph 4 km h This means that City Safety will not react if your vehicle approaches another vehicle at very low speed for example when parking The function is active at speeds up to approx imately 18 mph 80 km h and assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically thereby avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a collision City Safety is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa tion City Safety triggers brief forceful braking if a low speed collision is imminent However the system will not intervene in situations where the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies the brakes even if a collision cannot be avoi ded This is done in order to always give the driver s actions highest priority City Safety activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time which means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations City Safety should not be used to alter the way in which the driver operates the vehicle The driver should never rely solely on this sys tem to safely stop the vehicle Normally the occupants of the vehicle will not be aware of City Safety except when the system intervenes when a low speed collision is imminent If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection system the two systems interact For more info
322. pen e Brush e Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains you can add paint immediately after removing dirt When touching up the vehicle it should be clean and dry The surface temperature should be above 60 F 15 C 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 346 Vehicle care Minor scratches on the surface If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the metal and an undamaged layer of paint remains the touch up paint can be applied as soon as the spot has been cleaned Repairing stone chips 1 Place a strip of masking tape over the dam aged surface Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it 2 Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush 3 When the primer surface is dry the paint can be applied using a brush Mix the paint thoroughly apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application SE If there is a longer scratch you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off After a few days polish the touched up areas Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish 08 Maintenance and specifications Q 08 347 01 1 MR so 0 0 11 SPECINCAt OMS ex e een EES 392 Overview of information and warning svmbols AAA 359 VOIVO PrODAMS orar rs a i reen i eg 362 Information Provided by lo 32 a AS cee 348 La 01 10 SPECIFICATIONS SS
323. per blades when they start to leave streaks Take into account the traffic road and weather conditions particularly with regard to stopping distance Never send text messages while driving Refrain from using or minimize the use of a cell phone while driving Reporting safety defects Reporting safety defects in the U S If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer ica LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investiga tion and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your retailer or Volvo Cars of North America LLC To con tact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or write to NHTSA U S Department of Trans portation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle is covered under a serv ice campaign safety or emission recall or similar action it should be completed as soon as possible Please check with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North America LLC if your ve
324. ph 60 km h The DSTC symbol in the instru ment panel will flash when TSA is working e If the driver switches off the DSTC sys tem s Spin Control function TSA will also be switched off but will be on again the next time the engine is started e TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly How TSA works Once swaying has begun it can be very diffi cult to stop which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle s movements particularly lateral movement If the system detects a tendency to sway the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehi cle If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes and engine power is temporarily reduced As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle trailer have once again become stable TSA will no stop regulating the brakes engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle 06 DIU your trip Attaching the towing eyelet Attaching the towing eyelet The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the cargo area with the spare tire and
325. ponsibility for driving in a safe manner Function G044835 e HDC can be switched on and off with the button in the center console An indicator light in the button illuminates when HDC is activated The indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates and a message is dis played when the system is controlling the vehicle s speed e HDC only functions when first or reverse gears are selected 1 will be shown in the instrument panel display when first gear is selected OLA HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position Hill Descent Control HDC Using HDC HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi mum speed of 6 mph 10 km h and 4 mph 7 km h in reverse However the accelerator pedal can be used to select any speed that is possible in first or reverse gears When the accelerator pedal is released speed is quickly reduced again to 6 mph 10 km h or 4 mph 7 km h depending on the gear selected regardless of the hill s gradient It is not nec essary to apply the brakes e The brake lights illuminate automatically when HDC is controlling the vehicle s speed e The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at any time by applying the brakes HDC is deactivated when e The button on the center console is pressed e A gear higher than first gear is selected e Disselected on vehicles with an automatic transmission HDC can be deactivated at any time If this is done while
326. press OK MENU If there is a disc in the player it will begin playing automatically Otherwise Insert disc will be displayed Insert the disc into the slot with the text side upward and it will begin playing automatically If a disc with audio video files is inserted its folder structure will be read by the system It may take several seconds until the disc begins playing depending on its quality and the amount of information it contains nformation Provided D Disc eject For reasons of traffic safety an ejected disc must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back into the slot Pause When the audio system volume is turned off completely the player will pause and will resume playing when the volume is turned up again Navigating a disc and playing tracks CD audio discs Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist and to navigate in this list Press OK MENU to con firm a choice and begin listening Press EXIT to cancel Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist s root level The buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad can also be used to change tracks Home burned CD DVD audio video files Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist and to navigate in this list Press OK MENU to con firm a choice and begin listening Use EXIT to stop or to go back in the disc s folder structure Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist s root level 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05
327. r 38 Emergency stoartmg ke 114 Emergency Towing NEE 281 282 Emission inspection readiness 315 Engine Overheatmg ENNEN EEN 79 EISE TEE deer 354 o oaa 112 SWEN G OR risens 114 Engine compartment OvervieW 317 Engine Drag Control EDO 149 Engine oil CHS CHIN A 318 low pressure warning light 77 18 SpDechfcGations 356 ere 357 EF TF AAS TN eege 12 Eyelets for anchoring Ioade 273 F Federal Clean Air AC 314 Floor mats NING E 345 placing COMCCUY E 112 Fluid epecificatons 357 Fog lights TROMU MOAN critica 94 EA Cee ee renee nee a ene ee ee 326 Four C active chassis system 151 Fe IN AUN AG E 22 disconnecting passenger s side air DAG ME 20 21 Front park asSiSt von 186 188 Fuel MMC aya cari ios 269 Fuel filler door Openino oooocoomoo 268 Fuel level warning light c oocccoom o 77 Fuel reourements 266 267 Fuel TANK VOIUMC scsi 357 FUSOS cccccoccncononcnnnnoninncnnnns 334 335 338 341 Garage door opener HomeLink Wireless Control System 109 Gasoline requireMents ccccseeeeeeeeees 267 Gas tank VOIUMEiiccsscocscsseansnenimenaionieds 357 GOES T 15 GOSMIONIC eseon 117 Geartronic automatic transmission 116 117 Generator warning Joh 78 Glossary of tire terminology 294 Grocery bag Noldeaasiisisidaidas das 213 Gross vehicle wei
328. r O o o O Dolby Pro Logic DO DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC H G044178 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes stereo sound s two channels to the left right and front rear speakers Dolby Pro Logic Il and the J symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation The Dolby Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation 1 Only available on models equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System 2 U S models only 3 Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Audyssey MultEQ CT G044129 The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used to optimize sound quality to help ensure a world class listening experience Using the infotainment system If the infotainment system is on when the igni tion is switched off it will come on automati cally the next time the ignition is put in mode l or higher and continue using the same source FM 1 etc that was in use when the ignition was switched off the driver s door must also be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless drive The infotainment system can be operated with out a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the On Off button 05 Infotainment Introduction While the engine is being started the infotain ment system will be temporarily interrupted and will resume when the engine h
329. r any components in the OWS system This could result in system malfunction Maintenance or repairs should only be carried out by an a trained and qualified Volvo service technician e The front passenger s seat should not be modified in any way This could reduce pressure on the seat cushion which might interfere with the OWS sys tem s function Passeng er s seat OCCU pancy sta tus OWS indi cator light status Passeng er s side front air bag status Seat unoc OWS indica Passenger s cupied tor light side front lights up airbag disa bled Seat occu OWS indica Passenger s pied by low _ tor light side front weight lights up airbag disa occupant bled object Seat occu OWS indica Passenger s pied by tor light is side front heavy occu not lit airbag ena pant object bled A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats Do not assume that the passenger s side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit Make sure the child restraint is properly installed If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger s side front air bag move the child restraint to the rear seat The OWS is designed to enable may inflate the passenger s side front airbag in the event of a collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger s seat The PASSE
330. r information regarding these regulations please consult your Volvo retailer 01 10 OO 111 09 Specifications 09 Specifications Dimensions A Wheelbase B Length C Load length floor seatback down D Load length floor E Height F Load height G Track front o D E D o o 109 2 2774 182 2 4627 70 4 1789 38 3 972 67 4 1713 31 6 802 64 3 1632 H Track rear Load width floor Width TS Cc Weights Width incl door mirrors folded out Width incl door mirrors folded in 09 Specifications Specifications 09 62 4 1586 42 9 1090 74 4 1891 83 5 2120 74 4 1891 CTS TN Canad Gross vehicle weight Capacity weight Permissible axle weights front Permissible axle weights rear Curb weight 6 cyl FWD 5200 Ibs 6 cyl AWD 5355 Ibs 6 cyl turbo AWD 5380 lbs 950 lbs all models 6 cyl FWD 2740 lbs 6 cyl AWD 2800 Ibs 6 cyl turbo AWD 2840 Ibs 6 cyl FWD 2545 lbs 6 cyl AWD 2640 Ibs 6 cyl turbo AWD 2645 Ibs 3870 4140 lbs 6 cyl FWD 2360 kg 6 cyl AWD 2430 kg 6 cyl turbo AWD 2440 kg 430 kg all models 6 cyl FWD 1245 kg 6 cyl AWD 1270 kg 6 cyl turbo AWD 1290 kg 6 cyl FWD 1155 kg 6 cyl AWD 1200 kg 6 cyl turbo AWD 1200 kg 1750 1880 kg kk 00 11 09 Specifications 09 Specifications Max roof load 220 lbs 100 kg Max trailer weights Without brakes 1650 lbs Withou
331. r phones metal lic objects or e g in a metal briefcase USA FCC ID KR55WK48952 KR55WK48964 NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired operation CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Siemens VDO 5WK48891 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards For Automobile Use Canada 1C 267T 5WK48952 267T 5WK48964 267T 5WK48891 NOTE This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired operation CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Location of the keyless drive antennas o ba A o O The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehi cle Gi On the tailgate near the wiper motor Left rear door handle Ceiling above the center of the rear seat O Under the floor of the cargo area near the rear seat Right rear door handle O Under th
332. r s door If a mes airbags an inflatable curtain or one or more of sage is displayed that the ignition is on the seat belt pretensioners has deployed The press the start button collision may have damaged an important YA Children should be seated safely Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint systems for all occupants including children Remember that regardless of age and size a child should always be properly restrained in a vehicle Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX LATCH attachments which make it more con venient to install child seats Some restraint systems for children are designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the lap portion of a lap shoulder belt Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly However chil dren could be endangered in a crash if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehi Cle Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle s interior in a sudden stop Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable substitute for a child restraint system In an accident a child held in a person s arms can be crushed between the vehicle s interior and an unrestrained person The child could also be injured by striking the interior or by being ejec ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact The same c
333. r sensor has a limited field of its use illegal vision In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not The radar sensor s capacity to detect vehicles detect other vehicles at all ahead is impeded e f ACC is not functioning properly 04 e if the radar sensor is obstructed and can O elise lee esu not detect other vehicles for example in heavy rain or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor ORC Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean G044032 e if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi cantly different from your own speed Radar sensor s field of vision shown in pink ay In certain situations the radar sensor can not detect vehicles at close quarters for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle Small vehicles such as motorcycles or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected 160 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Adaptive Cruise Control ACC e Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli sion avoidance system The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle In curves the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle Fault tracing and actions If the message Radar blocked See manual is displayed this means
334. raction Control sys tem is actively working to stabilize the vehicle see page 149 for more detailed information Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire pressure in one or more tires is low see page 309 for detailed information W Low fuel level When this light comes on the vehicle should be refueled as soon as possible See page 266 for information about fuel and refueling Information symbol The information symbol lights up and a text message Is displayed to provide the driver with e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Instruments and controls 03 kk T1 D 03 Your driving environment 03 aio goana y Instruments and controls necessary information about one of the vehi cle s systems The message can be erased and the symbol can be turned off by pressing the READ button see page 131 for information or this will take place automatically after a short time the length of time varies depending on the function affected The information symbol may also illuminate together with other symbols Es High beam indicator This symbol illuminates when the high beam headlights are on or if the high beam flash function is used K Left turn signal indicator CS Right turn signal indicator e Both turn signal indicators will flash when the hazard warning flashers are used e lf either of these indica
335. ractor seat belt see page 38 Firmly tension all straps On models equipped with the optional Cargo area cover this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors top of the head restraint The strap should be routed beneath the head restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a colli sion occur Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap Integrated two stage booster cushion Volvo s optional integrated booster cushions are located in the outboard seating positions These booster cushions have been specially designed to help safeguard children in the rear seat They should be stowed folded down into the seat cushion when not in use When using an integrated booster cushion the child must be secured with the vehicle s three point seat belt Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between e Stage 1 48 80 lbs
336. ramming It t ons is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes Refer to Erasing HomeLink Buttons 1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls Inc gt gt i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 109 OI 03 Your driving environment 03 110 HomeLink Wireless Control System Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section If the HomeLink indica tor light does not change to a rapidly blink ing light after performing these steps con tact HomeLink at www homelink com 3 Firmly press hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink but ton up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on con stantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a con stant light continue with Program ming steps 4 6 to complete the pro gramming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 Atthe garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the
337. ranty and Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change intervals CAUTION Not checking the oil level regularly can result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low Oil that is lower than the specified qual ity can damage the engine Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used Never fill oil above the MAX mark This could cause an increase in oil consump tion Oil changes should be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech nician Volvo recommends Castrol oil products Before checking the oil The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX The car should be parked on a level sur face If the engine is warm wait for at least 10 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off G021737 marks on the dipstick Checking the oil 1 Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint free rag Reinsert the dipstick pull it out and check the oil level The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks 08 Maintenance and specifications 3 Add oil if necessary If the level is close to the MIN mark add approximately 0 5 US quarts 0 5 liters of oil 4 Recheck the level and add more oil if nec essary until the level is near the MAX mark WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces Synthetic oil is not
338. re included with the RSE system The cordless headphones are activated using the On Off button 2 The indicator light 4 will illuminate when the headphones are on Select CH A channel A or CH B channel B with switch 1 Use control 3 to adjust the volume Rear Seat Entertainment RSE The headphones will switch off automati cally after approx 3 minutes if they are not used Replacing batteries in the headphones The headphones use two AAA batteries It is advisable to have extra batteries on hand during long trips E bel Lo KE 0 Battery cover and retaining screw 1 Unscrew the retaining screw and remove the battery cover 2 Remove the old batteries and insert new ones in the directions indicated by the symbols in the battery holder 3 Put the cover back in place and tighten the retaining screw Disposing of old batteries Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner External headphones can be connected to the 3 5 mm headphone socket on the side of the head restraint see the illustration on page 245 for the location of this socket Adjust the volume with the remote control This A V AUX socket is used to connect exter nal devices to the RSE system When connect ing an external device always follow the instructions provided with the device Devices connected through the A V AUX socket can use the screens cordless headphones the 3
339. read area not the sidewall Tires with large holes or tears cannot be repaired with the tire sealing system After use stow the tire sealing system properly to help prevent rattling i n f P Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING After using the tire sealing system the vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles 200 km Have the tire inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced The vehicle should not be driven faster than 50 mph 80 km h while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system After using the tire sealing system drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops Tire sealing system overview x A Es A Ee E O Speed limit sticker O On Off switch Electrical wire ER Bottle holder orange cover Protective hose cover Air release knob Y Hose Bottle with sealing compound Air pressure gauge Please keep the following points in mind when using the tire sealing system The sealing compound bottle no 8 in the illustration contains 1 2 Ethanol and natural rubber latex These sub stances are harmful if swallowed The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the skin the cen tral nervous system and the
340. reca librate TPMS to conform to Volvo s recom mended tire inflation pressures see the infla 07 Wheels and tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS tion pressure table on page 291 for example if higher inflation pressure is necessary when transporting heavy loads etc This is done in the vehicle s menu system see page 134 To recalibrate 1 Switch off the engine 2 Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and put the ignition in mode I or Il see page 82 for additional information 3 Press the MY CAR key in the center con sole control panel and select Settings gt Car settings Tire pressure 4 Press OK MENU select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK MENU again 5 Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph 40 km h continuously for at least 1 minute gt When the calibration message is no longer displayed TPMS has been reca librated to the new inflation pressure Activating deactivating TPMS Canadian models only 1 Switch off the engine 2 Put the ignition in mode I or Il see page 82 for additional information 3 Press the MY CAR key in the center con sole control panel and select Settings gt Car settings Tire pressure 4 Select Tire pressure system ON Off and press OK MENU 07 W Mate maintenance EE 314 Maintaining 5 QUIN ellen SRM EE 315 Hood and engine CO MPARIMEONE vecies viene vaceostsseesnsnedsewcevectanavaneessdveenoea vas 317 o e A a E E 318 F
341. ress MY CAR to access the My Car menus Press OK MENU to select a highlighted selection or to store a certain function in the system s memory EN Turn to navigate up down among menu selections EXIT EXIT functions EXIT can be used to go back in the menu structure or to cancel the most recent selec tion The results of pressing EXIT vary depending on where you are in the menu struc ture e Press EXIT briefly to go back one step ata time in the current menu e Press and hold EXIT to go to the main MY CAR menu e From the main MY CAR menu press and hold EXIT to go to the infotainment sys tem s main view See page 208 for addi tional information Steering wheel keypad The keypad varies according to the vehicle s equipment Turn the thumb wheel to go up down among menu selections Press the thumb wheel to make a selection or store a func tion in the system s memory O EXIT 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk e Information Provided i Sg 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Paths The current menu level is displayed at the upper right of the center console display Menu paths are displayed as follows for example Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock Driver door then all The following is an example of how to set a function in the menu system 04 1 Press the MY CAR button on the center console control panel
342. ressing sf or by switching off the engine The set speed is cleared Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 154 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Introduction Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is an optional system designed to assist the driver by main taining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic such as on highways and other main roads When the driver has set the desired speed and the time interval to the vehicle ahead ACC functions as follows e lfthere are no other vehicles in the lane ahead of you your vehicle will travel at the set speed e If ACC s radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle in the lane ahead the sys tem will adapt your vehicle s speed to help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead When there are no longer slower moving vehicles ahead your vehicle will accelerate to resume the set speed If ACC is switched off completely or in standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to another vehicle ahead the driver will be warned by the Distance Alert system see page 164 1 The illustration is schematic details will vary depending on the model e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic weather and road conditions The Function section provides information about lim itati
343. restrained as long as possible 9 01 Safety A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear view mirror is illuminated on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi tion l wem 3 Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Do not place the in plate into the buckle lock until a distinct er s seat click is audible e An infant seat must be in the rear facing position only Refer to page 47 48 for information on e The infant seat should not be positioned securing a child restraint using ISOFIX behind the driver s seat unless there is LATCH lower anchors and or top tether anchorages adequate space for safe installation 1 Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle 2 Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer s instruc tions 0 RE eS ee 01 Safety 9 d Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4 Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt s automatic locking function The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully 5 Press the infant seat firmly in place let
344. ribes some of the emission related com ponents Owner maintenance Periodic maintenance requirements and inter vals are described in your vehicle s Warranty and Service Records Information booklet The following points can be carried out between the normally scheduled maintenance services Each time the car is refueled e Check the engine oil level e Clean the windshield windshield wipers headlights and taillights Monthly e Check cold tire pressure in all tires Inspect the tires for wear e Check that engine coolant and other fluid levels are between the indicated min and max markings e Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass cleaner and soft paper towels e Wipe driver information displays with a soft cloth e Visually inspect battery terminals for cor rosion Corrosion may indicate a loose ter minal connector or a battery near the end of its useful service life Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information As needed Wash the car including the undercarriage to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of dirt and corrosion that can be caused by salt residues Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at the base of the windshield and from other pla ces where they may collect Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www volvotechinfo com Ca o E we o Ee O O If a garage jack is used to lif
345. ribution is sh ath le d can be set separately When Defroster Air distribution is shown in the center console dis ho wehicle is stared the This function defrosts de ices play che E most recent setting is the windshield and front side Auto resumed Gy windows The indicator light in the defroster button lights when the function is active The function automatically regulates cooling heating blower speed recirculation ir dietrihiiti Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up b and air distribution to main 9 ee E ert e Blower speed increases automatically and EEN t t selecting a higher lower temperature than l tte SA A the actual temperature required the air conditioning will switch on if not If you select one or more man already on and if the passenger compart ual functions the other func ment blower is not turned off to dehumid tions continue to be controlled automatically ify the air in the passenger compartment The air quality sensor is engaged and all man Air conditioning can be switched off by ual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressing the AC button pressed The display shows AUTO e Recirculation will not function while defrost CLIMATE is engaged The climate system will return to its previous settings when the defroster function is switched off Recirculation air quality system Recirculation This function can be used to shut out exhaust fumes smoke e
346. rmation about the Colli sion Warning with Auto brake system see page 172 1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation e City Safety is a supplemental aid to the driver It can never replace the driver s attention to traffic conditions or his her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner e City Safety does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic weather or road conditions e City Safety only reacts to vehicles traveling in the same direction as your vehicle and does not react to small vehi cles bicycles or motorcycles or to peo ple or animals e City Safety is not activated when your vehicle is backing up e City Safety functions at speeds up to 18 mph 80 km h This system can help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph 15 km h If the difference in speed is greater a collision cannot be avoided but the speed at which the collision occurs can be reduced The driver must apply the vehicle s brakes for full brak ing effect e Never wait for City Safety to intervene in a potential collision situation The 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 City Safety driver is always responsible for main taining a safe distance to the vehicle ahead Function Location of the laser sensor in the windshield
347. rn TUNE to access the channel list 2 Use the number key buttons to enter the channel s number 3 Press OK MENU The radio will tune to this channel even if it belongs to a category other than the currently selected one Scanning SCAN automatically searches through the list of satellite channels The search will only be carried out in the selected category see page 215 for more detailed information on the scan function Storing a channel A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored 10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2 see 05 Infotainment 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment 05 page 215 for detailed information on storing channels e Along press on one of the number keys stores the currently tuned channel on that key e A short press on a number key while the radio is in SAT 1 or SAT 2 mode will tune to the preset satellite channel stored on that button regardless of the currently selected channel category Searching for and storing songs The Song Seek function provides notification when Sirius is broadcasting the songs selected in song memory Song memory enables you to store the name of the song for future advance notification when that song is being played Song seek When a satellite radio channel plays one of the songs stored in the song memory while the Song seek feature is activated the listener will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal Press OK MENU to listen to the song or EXI
348. rning does not react to ani mals Warnings are only provided when the risk of collision is high The Function section provides information about lim itations that the driver must be aware of before using Collision Warning Collision Warning will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedes trians at speeds above 50 mph 80 km h e Collision Warning will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedes trians in darkness or in tunnels even if there is street lighting in the area e The auto brake function can help pre vent a collision or reduce the speed at impact but the driver should always apply the brakes for the best possible braking effect even if auto brake is actively applying the brakes e Never wait for a collision warning This system is designed to be a supplemen tary driving aid It is not however intended to replace the driver s atten tion and judgement The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe dis tance and speed even when the colli sion warning system is in use e Maintenance of the Collision Warning system s components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection Function G043662 Function overview Visual warning signal collision risk Radar sensor EN Camera Collision Warning The radar sensor and the camera work together to detect a pedestrian stationar
349. roduction When the engine has started all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym bol which only goes out when the brake is dis engaged If the engine does not start or if the function check is Carried out in ignition mode Il all sym bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the vehicle s emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure Certain symbols may not have their functions illustrated depending on the vehicle s equip ment Indicator and information symbols symbol Description Fault in the Active Bending Light ABL system LD lt 3 E e Malfunction indicator light ENGINE Anti lock brake system ABS Rear fog light on Stability system Tire pressure monitoring sen sor TPMS Low fuel level Information symbol see text in information display High beam indicator Left turn signal indicator Right turn signal indicator DSTC The stability system s Sport SPORT e H mode is activated JUDEG ei GW Fault in the Active Bending Light ABL system This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault in the ABL system See page 93 for more information about this system Malfunction Indicator Light As you drive a computer called On Board Diagnostics I OBDII monitors your vehicle s engine transmission electrical and emission systems The malfunction indicator CHECK ENGINE light will illuminate if the computer senses a conditi
350. rophic failure Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will ower the vehi cle s GVW rating Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity Consult your Volvo retailer for information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grading information ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire gra ded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and many depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate TRACTION The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur faces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The trac tion grade assigned to
351. rting as well as decreas ing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up For winter use 5W 30 oil par ticularly the synthetic type is recom mended Be sure to use good quality oil but do not use cold weather oil for hard driving or in warm weather see page 356 for more information on engine oil Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance inter vals except at owner request and at addi tional charge e The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wip ers lighting etc are used more often Moreover the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops In very cold weather a poorly charged bat tery can freeze and be damaged It is there fore advisable to check the state of charge more frequently and spray an anti rust oil on the battery posts e Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on all four wheels for winter driving see page 298 e To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from freezing add washer solvents containing antifreeze This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during winter driving requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows Down to 14 F 10 C 1 part washer solvent and 06 During your trip 4 parts water Down to 5 F 15 C 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 F 18 C 1 part washer solvent and 2 part
352. rvice life The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts driv ing conditions and climate Extreme cold Battery may also further decrease the battery s starting capacity e Because the battery s starting capacity decreases with time it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances e Never use a quick charger to charge the battery OD CAUTION The infotainment system s energy saving feature may not function correctly or at all and or a message may be displayed if a battery charger or jumper cables are not connected properly e The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger Only the ground point on the chassis may be used See page 114 for an illustration and addi tional information 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 kk 08 Maintenance and specifications Battery WARNING Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark Do not smoke near the battery Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin fabrics or painted surfaces If con tact occurs flush the affected area immediately with water Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly Maintenance
353. rying capacity of your vehicle is determined by factors such as the number of passengers the amount of cargo the weight of any accessories that may be installed etc e Stop the engine put the gear selector in P and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects e The vehicle s driving characteristics To increase loading space the rear seat back may change depending on the weight rests can be folded down see page 87 and distribution of the load When loading the cargo area keep the follow e A 44 pound 20 kg object produces a ing in mind force of 2 200 pounds 1 000 kg ina e Load objects in the cargo area against the head on collision at 30 mph 50 km h backrest whenever possible e The cargo area and rear seat should not E e Unstable loads can be secured to the load S PE E S P Power ilgais dos Burni SEN Se ER S SCH Se ES side windows Objects placed higher A AN PIE OO than this level could impede the func Automatic opening e Stop the engine and apply the parking tion of the Inflatable Curtain The power tailgate can be opened automati brake when loading or unloading long cally in the three ways objects The gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads which could R By pressing and holding the SS but set the vehicle in motion ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate begins to open O By pressing and holding the CA button on the remote key until the tailgate begins to open
354. s advisable to only store music files on the drive It will take considerably longer for the system 05 Infotainment AUX USB sockets to index the files on the drive if it contains any thing other than compatible music files The system supports removable media that uses the USB 2 0 standard and the FAT32 file system It can index up to 1 000 folders and a maximum of 254 sub folders files for each folder How ever the highest folder level can sup port up to 1 000 sub folders files When using a longer type of USB device connecting it with a USB adapter cable will help reduce mechan ical wear on the USB socket and on the device USB hub A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket making it possible to connect several USB devices at the same time To select one of the devices go to the menu USB menu gt Select USB device MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle s audio system In order to use an MP3 player the sys tem must be set to USB Removable device Mass Storage Device iPod An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the USB cable The system will only play audio files from an iPod When an iPod is used as a sound source the vehicle s audio system has a menu structure similar to the one in the iPod See the iPod s manual for detailed information Compatible file formats via the USB socket The following
355. s bazard 94 Warning NODS E 15 76 77 78 Warning svmbol 79 Warning system collision 172 173 UE gl 314 Washer Tud eee ee eee eeeeeees 330 357 Washers e o A 99 WISI BEE 98 Water driving through occcocccccncnnno 263 po A irene ae eet 343 WelgM A E a 353 ler 286 elle AAA 306 te lui DEE 287 Whiplash Protection Gvstem 33 Windows PONY EE 101 Windshield IR COAT D 100 rain SSNS EEN 98 WaS NE teacher 99 wiDersdwashere 98 Windshield washer fluid 330 357 Windshield wipere un 329 Wiper blades replacing tailgate wier 330 replacing windshield wipers 329 Ir formation Provided by Information Provided by a AN VOLVO Volvo Car Corporation TP 13257 USA A Canada AT 1120 Printed in Sweden G teborg 201 1 Copyright 2000 2011 Volvo Car Corporation Information Provided by A 63 D AL ER J
356. s 46 Child restraint avstems 40 convertible seal EN 44 infant eeate 42 Child safety Jocke ennnen 52 City Safety e PA ne 167 li wesivicstcndvxavkenetusaandvenntonaaaans 144 air Odetrbution eee 140 146 lee 141 Interior Air Quality Gwvstem 140 us eessen 139 passenger compartment filter 139 FOTO SY AIM EE 139 Clock Seting EE 80 Cold weather driving 264 Collision warning systemM 172 173 Compass in rearview TmUrTOE 105 Conserving electrical current 263 Controls center Conscole 256 Convertible seats Au 44 COGAN i iernnnneimvceynnnssinnt A 320 357 Cooling system general information 263 Courtesy NIGNUAG musicians 95 96 Crash Beie E 36 Cruise eoptroal eur ETNRSKK NK 152 153 SO 151014111 eegenen 154 Curb e EE 295 Current Gopserving 263 Deiroster 144 Detachable key blade ccooccnccocmmmo 61 DIMENSIONS 020cecececececececececececececeaees 352 Disconnecting the front passenger s air Del e o oo 26 27 BoA 95 96 Door mirrore 103 Diver alesana 180 Driver distraction warmimg 13 Driving ECONOMICA sitecctesesctcaceivswecdsensiies 262 Driving in Cold weather 264 Driving through water 263 ce ee 144 145 Economical GIVING cacaos 262 Electric parking Drake 122 Electronic Climate Control 142 144 145 air distribution Table 146 Interior Air Quality System 145 Emergency locking retracto
357. s advised to park outside of and or operation of HomeLink It is also rec 03 the garage ommended that a new battery be placed in Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U S training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards this includes radio frequency signal any garage door opener model manu factured before April 1 1982 A garage Position the end of your hand held trans The HomeLink Wireless Control System pro door that cannot detect an object sig mitter 1 3 inches 5 14 cm away from the vides a convenient way to replace up to three naling the door to stop and reverse HomeLink button you wish to program hand held radio frequency RF transmitters does not meet current U S federal while keeping the indicator light in view used to activate devices such as gate opera safety standards For more information tors garage door openers entry door locks contact HomeLink at Simultaneously press and hold both the security systems even home lighting Addi www homelink com nosen Fome a ane nand nea tele ers tional HomeLink information can be found on A ere a crac the Internet at www homelink com Retain the original transmitter of the RF device Ge light Sg you mey release a ihe you are programming for use in other vehicles Ee EE and hana rela mans as well as for future HomeLink prog
358. s water Down to 18 F 28 C 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water e Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks e Avoid using de icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks 06 Information Provided by 06 06 During your trip Refueling Fuel requirements Deposit control gasoline detergent additives Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas oline to control engine deposits Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and intake valves clean Consistent use of deposit control gasolines will help ensure good driva bility and fuel economy If you are not sure whether the gasoline contains deposit control additives check with the service station oper ator OKT Volvo does not recommend the use of exter nal fuel injector cleaning systems Unleaded fuel Each Volvo has a three way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline U S and Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv ering unleaded gasoline be labeled UNLEA DED Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your vehicle s filler inlet It is unlawful to dis pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled unleaded gasoline only Leaded gasoline damages the three way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor system Repeated use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective ness of the emission control system and could result in loss of emission warranty coverage State and local vehicle inspection progra
359. s when parking The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle for example when parallel parking To activate this function select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down The function can be activated deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Side mirror settings gt Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror See page 133 for a description of the menu system The door mirror will reset to its normal position e after 10 seconds when reverse is disen gaged and the car remains stopped e immediately when reverse is disengaged and the vehicle s forward speed exceeds approximately 6 mph 10 km h e immediately if you press the correspond ing L or R button again e when the engine is turned off e when the side mirrors are folded in ORU Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time Automatically tilting the door mirrors when parking The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle for example when parallel parking When the transmission is no longer in i i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN 03 kk 103 D 03 Your driving environment 03 reverse the mirrors will automatically return to their original position This function can be activated deactivated in M
360. seat belt fastened The best way to help protect the child here is to place the child on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips see the illustration on page 46 Legislation in your state or province may mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in combination with the seat belt depending on the child s age and or size Please check local regulations A specially designed and tested booster cush ion and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo retailer USA for children weighing 33 80 Ibs 15 36 kg and 38 54 inches 97 137 cm in height Canada for children weighing 40 80 Ibs 18 36 kg and 40 54 inches 102 137 cm in height 01 Safety 9 01 gt gt gee o E 01 A Child Child safety eee e Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions backrests in the front passenger s seat We also recommend that children under 4 feet 7 inches 140 cm in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened e On hot days the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat related injury or death Small children are particularly at risk Child seat should always be registered See page 39 for more information Automatic Locking Retractor Emergency Locking Retractor ALR ELR To make child seat installation easier each seat
361. shion This could cause OWS to disable the front passenger s side airbag 01 Safety 9 Occupant Weight Sensor 01 WARNING Do not place any type of object on the front passenger s seat in such a way that jamming pressing or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor Emergency Locking Retrac tor ALR ELR seat belt see page 38 No objects should be placed under the front passenger s seat This could inter fere with the OWS system s function 9 01 Safety 01 30 Side impact protection SIPS airbags G032949 Location of the side impact SIPS airbags front seats only As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System SIPS airbags The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions The SIPS air bags are designed to deploy only during cer tain side impact collisions depending on the crash severity angle speed and point of impact 5 a Driver s side SIPS airbag r 2 Passenger s side SIPS airbag SIPS airbag deployment one airbag occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations Information Provided by SIPS airbag deployment one airbag oc
362. sidered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding ambient air This tem perature is normally reached after the vehi cle has been parked for at least 3 hours Vehicle loading Loads Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi mum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS CMVSS label and the vehicle s tire informa tion placard Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equip ment Capacity weight All weight added to the curb weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo weight For trailer towing information please refer to the section Towing a trailer on page 278 1 See page 278 Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS CMVSS label The total load on each axle must never exceed its maximum permissible weight Gross vehicle weight GVW The vehicle s curb weight cargo passen gers The location of the various labels in your vehicle c
363. sidered to be hot If you have to drive farther than this dis tance to pump your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pres sures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated To check inflation pressure 1 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve 2 Add air to reach the recommended air pressure Replace the valve cap 4 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak 5 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts bulges or other irregular ities 6 Repeat this procedure for each tire includ ing the spare If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires Consult the tire inflation pressure table on page 291 or see the inflation pressure plac ard Tire ratings Speed ratings The speed ratings in the table translate as fol low Speed ratings M 81 mph 130 km h Q 100 mph 160
364. ss and hold the left arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second To go to subchamnel 2 if available press and hold the right arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second If you are currently tuned to a frequency s main channel pressing and holding the left arrow key for approximately 1 second will tune to the next lower radio frequency When the radio has gone into HD mode it may take several seconds before the gt symbol ifthe current frequency has any sub channels is displayed to the left of the frequency Pressing and hold ing the arrow keys for approximately 1 second before the main sub channel icon is displayed will cause the radio to tune to the next available radio station not to the current station s sub chan nels When you are no longer in broadcasting range of the currently tuned sub chan nel No reception will be displayed The radio will then be muted and it will be necessary to tune to or search for a new radio station Sub channels can also be stored as presets see page 215 for information on storing sta tions If you press a sub channel s preset button it may take up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audible If you press this button while you are out of digital range of the transmitter No HD reception will be displayed i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Sirius s
365. ssure table on page 291 07 WARNING After use The foam block and spare wheel must be Current legislation prohibits the use of the Temporary Spare tire other than as a tem porary replacement for a punctured tire It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire Road holding and handling may be affected with the Temporary Spare in use 1 The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel E The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the rim side down There are two foam blocks one under the spare wheel and one 4 over inside The upper one contains all tools The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam blocks Taking out the spare wheel 1 Open the floor hatch 2 Undo the retaining bolt 3 Lift out the foam block 4 Lift out the spare wheel The other two blocks can remain in the spare wheel well 1 The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area See the illustration on page 281 for its location 306 i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction CAUTION 2 replaced in the reverse order Note the arrow on the upper foam block It should point for ward Changing a wheel Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P Take out the jack lug wrench the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool stowed under the floor of the trunk
366. straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the wind shield difficult to see e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Distance Alert WARNING Bad weather or winding roads may affect the radar sensor s capacity to detect vehicles ahead The size of the vehicle ahead such as a motorcycle may also make it difficult to detect This may result in the warning light illuminating at a shorter distance than the one that has been set or that the light will not come on at all 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 165 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Symbols and messages in the display Time interval while it is being set Time interval after it has been set Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles See page 159 for information on the radar sensor s limitations 04 Collision warn Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning required properly Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician 166 Option accessory for more information see Introduction City Safety Introduction City Safety is a support system designed to help the driver avoid low speed collisions when driving in slow moving stop and go traffic City Safety is not active if your vehicle s s
367. straight out of the remote key Reinserting the key blade in the remote key 1 Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up Carefully slide the key blade into its groove 3 Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place Unlocking the doors with the detached key blade Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver s door lock Turn the key blade clock wise approximately one quarter turn to unlock the driver s door only After unlocking the driver s door with the key blade opening the door will trigger the alarm To disable the alarm Insert the remote key in the ignition slot This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive Replacing batteries in the remote key PCC The battery batteries in the remote key PCC should be replaced if e The information symbol lights up and a text appears in the information display and or e the vehicle s locks repeatedly do not react when a button on the remote key PCC is pressed within approximately 60 ft 20 m from the vehicle kk e eee 02 Locks and alarm 02 02 Locks and alarm 02 a o Remote key and key blade Battery type CR 2430 3 V one battery in the remote key two batteries in the PCC G021085 E be o 10 SE o O Opening the remote key PCC Loi ED Slide the spring loaded catch to the side ES Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key El EP Ins
368. suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during cornering braking and accelerating Fail ure to do so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or adversely affect handling Do not mix tires of different design as this could also negatively affect overall tire road grip Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads in warm weather They should be removed when the winter driving season has ended Studded tires should be run in 300 600 miles 500 1000 km during which the vehicle should be driven as smoothly as possible to give the studs the opportunity to seat properly in the tires The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime Please consult state or provincial regula tions restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires 07 Wheels and tires Temporary Spare Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle is called a Tem porary Spare Recommended tire pressure See the placard on the B pillar or on the fuel filler door should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on In the event of damage to this tire a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the Temporary Spare tire other than as a tem porary replaceme
369. sure Co Menus and messages 04 kk 131 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages 04 Service required See manual Book time for maintenance Time for regular maintenance Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as possible Read the owner s manual Time to book service at an authorized Volvo retailer Time for regular service at an author ized Volvo work shop The timing is determined by the number of miles driven number of months since the last service engine running time Maintenance over due Temporarily OFF Power save mode If the service inter vals are not fol lowed the warranty does not cover any damaged parts Contact an author ized Volvo workshop for service A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again The audio system is switched off to save current Charge the battery The MY CAR menus Introduction The menu system provides access to menus for operating many of the vehi cle s functions such as setting the clock door mirrors locks etc Navigating in the menus is done using the but tons on the center console control panel or with the right side steering wheel keypad Some of the features mentioned in this section are optional Operation Center console controls Center console controls for menu navigation P
370. system see page 231 for instructions on pairing an external device There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to the hands free system for the first time Method 1 using the vehicle s menus 1 Activate the cell phone s Bluetooth func tion to make the phone discoverable refer to the phone s owner s manual if neces sary or go to www volvocars com Activate the vehicle s Bluetooth hands free system by briefly pressing the TEL button Continue by pressing OK MENU Select Change phone and press OK MENU gt Add phone will be displayed If other cell phones have already been paired with the infotainment system their names will also be displayed Press OK MENU With the cell phone in discoverable mode press OK MENU gt The infotainment system will search for cell phones that are in range which takes approximately 30 seconds Any phones detected will be displayed with their Bluetooth names The hands free system s Bluetooth name will appear in the cell phone s display as My Volvo Car Select one of the cell phones shown in the center console display Using the cell phone s keypad enter the digits shown in the center console display and press the button on the cell phone used to confirm a choice Bluetooth hands free connection Method 2 using the cell phone s menus 1 Activate the hands free system by briefly pressing the TEL button in the center con sole If there is a ce
371. t brakes 750 kg With brakes 1 7 8 ball 2 000 Ibs With brakes 1 7 8 ball 900 kg With brakes 2 ball 3 300 Ibs With brakes 2 ball 1500 kg Max tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg A FWD Front Wheel Drive D AWD All Wheel Drive Engine specifications Specification Model 3 2 6 cyl 3 2 6 cyl Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4 Output kW rps 179 107 171 108 224 93 Output hp rpm 240 6400 230 6500 300 5600 Torque Nm rps 320 53 300 55 440 35 70 Torque ft lbs rpm 236 3200 221 3300 325 2100 4200 No of cylinders 6 6 6 Bore in mm 3 3 84 3 3 84 3 23 82 Stroke in mm 3 78 96 3 78 96 3 67 93 2 09 Specifications 011 10 OM 11 Specifications 09 Specification Model 3 2 6 cyl 3 2 6 cy l Displacement 3 19 liters 194 8 cu in 3 19 liters 194 8 cu in 2 95 liters 175 cu in Compression ratio 10 8 1 10 351 9 3 1 A This engine may not be available on all markets kk Information Provided by 01 10 00 111 09 396 09 Specifications Specifications Engine oil Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC specification GF 4 API SL or ACEA A1 B1 Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy engine performance or engine pro tection Volvo recommends Castrol Depending on your driving habits premium or synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ omy and engine protection Consult your Volvo retailer for recommendations on premium or synthe
372. t detect all pedes trians in all situations such as in dark ness at night and cannot detect parti ally hidden pedestrians people who are less than approx 32 in 80 cm tall or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies kk w Option accessory for more information see Introduction WES 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera with ice or snow Fog heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera No action possible Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the camera to register display visibility The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this 04 surface cleaned Symbols and messages in the display Collis n warning OFF Collision Warning is switched off This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis eS appear after approx 5 seconds It can also be erased by pressing the READ button A Collision warn Unavaila Collision Warning cannot be activated This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate ME ble
373. t the sys tem is not functioning properly and has been disengaged Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician CAUTION In certain circumstances the park assist system may give unexpected warning sig nals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound fre quencies as the system This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles wet tires on asphalt pneumatic brakes motorcycle exhaust pipes etc This does not indicate a fault in the system Option accessory for more information see Introduction Cleaning the sensors G031402 Location of the front sensors G031403 Location of the rear sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly Clean them 04 Comfort and driving pleasure with water and a suitable car washing deter gent Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals If the sensors are obstructed by e g dirt snow or ice this could result in false warn ing signals from the park assist system 04 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 189 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 190 Rear Park Assist Camera PAC Introduction The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the center console to show the area behind the car while you are backing up PAC also shows guiding lines in the on screen image to indicate the dire
374. t the vehi cle again 02 PCC with keyless drive only Remote key not recognized during start Try to start the vehicle again Car key not found If the problem con tinues insert the remote key into the ignition slot and try to start the vehicle again Immobilizer Try Remote key fault start again during start Contact an authorized Volvo workshop CAUTION Never use force when inserting the remote key in the ignition slot The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged USA FCC ID LTQWFS 125VO This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following con dition 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Canada IC 3659A WFS125VO Operation is subject to the following condi tions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device See page 112 for information on starting the vehicle Replacing the battery in the remote key The batteries should be replaced if e The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control Please change batteries is shown in the display and or e if the locks do not react after several attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle OLA The remote key s range is normall
375. t the vehicle the two jack attachments points should be used They are specially reinforced to bear the weight of the vehicle A garage jack can also be placed under the front of the engine support frame Take care not to damage the splash guard under the engine Ensure that the jack is posi tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it Always use axle stands or similar structures If a two post hoist is used to lift the vehicle the front and rear lift arm pads should be centered under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard edge of the sill rail see illustration Emission inspection readiness What is an Onboard Diagnostic System OBD Il OBD ll is part of your vehicle s computerized engine management system It stores diagnos tic information about your vehicle s emission controls It can light the Check Engine light MIL if it detects an emission control fault A fault is a component or system that is not performing within an expected range A fault may be permanent or temporary OBD II will store a message about any fault How do states use OBD II for emission inspections Many states connect a computer directly to a vehicle s OBD II system The inspector can then read faults In some states this type of 08 Maintenance and specifications Maintaining your car 08 kk 08 Maintenance and specifications Maintaining your car inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission way driving is typic
376. t visible to the cam era the system cannot detect the pedestrian The following conditions apply e In order to detect a pedestrian the system must have a full view of the person s entire 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection body and the person must be at least Fault tracing and actions 32 in 80 cm tall If the message Windscreen Sensors e The system cannot detect a pedestrian blocked is displayed this means that the cam carrying a large object era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians e The camera s capacity to see a pedestrian vehicles or road marker lines in front of the at dawn or dusk is limited much as it is for vehicle the human eye This in turn means that Collision Warning with e The camera s function is deactivated and Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Con in tunnels even if there is street lighting in trol will not have full functionality the area A The table lists possible causes for this mes WARNING sage being displayed and suitable actions e Collision Warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to be a supplementary driving aid It is not however intended to replace the driv er s attention and judgement The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner e The system canno
377. t when leaving the vehicle especially if there are children in the vehicle Never open the driver s door while driv ing or when the vehicle is being towed The steering lock could otherwise be activated making it impossible to steer the vehicle On vehicles with the optional keyless drive never remove the remote key from the vehicle while driving or during towing Always place the gear selector in Park and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine run ning Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation The exhaust gases contain carbon monox ide which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous After a cold start idle speed may be noticeably higher than normal for a short period This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal operating tem perature as quickly as possible which enables them to control emissions and help reduce the vehicle s impact on the environment CAUTION When starting in cold weather the auto matic transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than nor mal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal operating tem perature Do not race a cold engine immediately after starting Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to prevent engine damage The engine should be idling when you move
378. tc from the passen ger compartment The air in the passenger compartment is then recirculated i e no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated The indicator light in the button will illuminate when recirculation is selected If the air in the car recirculates for too long there is a risk of condensation forming on the insides of the windows especially in winter Timer The timer function minimizes the risk of fog ging or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the function after a certain length of time depend ing on the ambient temperature Activate deactivate the function under Climate settings Recirculation timer See page 133 for a description of the menu system NOTE When Defroster is selected recirculation is always deactivated Interior Air Quality System IAQS This system consists of a multifilter and an air quality sensor The filter helps remove gases and particles from the incoming air thereby reducing the amounts of odors and contami nants entering the vehicle The air quality sen sor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger com partment is recirculated e no outside air enters the vehicle The filter also cleans recir culated passenger compartment air Wh
379. ted a comfortable tem perature in the cabin Keep the IR transceivers lenses clean by wiping them regularly with a damp cloth A dirty lens could affect the func tion of the remote control Ignition modes and electrical current to RSE RSE can be activated with the ignition in modes I or Il and when the engine is running See page 82 for detailed information about the various ignition modes If a film is being played it will stop momentarily while the engine is being started and will resume when the engine is running Using RSE for more than approx 10 minutes when the engine is not running will drain the vehicle s battery and may make the engine difficult or impossible to start A message will be displayed on the screen if the battery s charge level becomes too low Using the system s menus Selections in the RSE menus are made using the remote control See page 251 for more information about the RSE menus Remote control A remote control is included with the RSE sys tem which can be used to control both screens in the rear seat as well as other infotainment system functions See page 254 for more detailed information about the remote control Option accessory for more information see Introduction Cordless headphones G044555 1 Switch for selecting channel A CH A or channel B CH B On Off button 6 Volume On Off indicator light Two sets of cordless headphones a
380. ted controls and display Standby mode Resume set speed Deactivating ER Activate set speed O Set speed indicator parentheses indicate standby mode Engaging the cruise control function Before a speed can be set the cruise control system must be engaged put in standby mode Press the f symbol 1 t gt The symbol illuminates and the text mph 5 indicates that cruise con trol is in standby mode e Putting cruise control in standby mode does not set a cruising speed When cruise control is in standby mode the driver s seat belt must be fastened before a cruising speed can be set Setting a speed Use the or buttons set the vehicle s cur rent speed The set speed is shown in the dis play OLE Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph 30 km h Adjusting the set speed After a speed has been set it can be increased or decreased by using the F or buttons 1 Press and hold down or until the vehicle reaches the desired speed gt This will become the set speed when the button is released Press or for approximately a half second and release the button to increase or decrease vehicle speed by approxi mately 1 mph 1 6 km h A temporary increase in speed by pressing the accelerator pedal for less than 1 minute e g when passing another car does not affect the current cruise c
381. tely if eyes are affected Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark Do not smoke near the battery Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury 03 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Transmission Automatic transmission Shiftgate positions Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the gear selector between the R N D and P positions The gear selector can be moved freely between the Geartronic manual shifting and Drive D positions while driving Park position P Select the P position when starting or parking Shiftlock When P has been selected the transmission is mechanically blocked in this position The brake pedal must be depressed and the igni tion must be in at least mode II see page 82 before the gear lever can be moved from the P position Always apply the parking brake when the vehi cle is parked Press the control to apply the brake see page 122 CAUTION The vehicle must be stationary when posi tion P is selected Reverse 0 The vehicle must be stationary when position R is selected Neutral position N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started with the gear selector in this position Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta tionary with the gear selector in position N Drive D D is the normal driving position The car auto matically shifts between the various forward g
382. tem and optional movement sensor the alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out and unlock only the tailgate Pressing this button for several seconds also opens the tail gate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate As an added safety precaution the parking lights will come on automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened After closing the tailgate will not automatically relock Press Lock to relock it and rearm the alarm See also the section Unlocking the tailgate from the passenger compartment Panic alarm This button can be used to attract attention during emergency situations To activate the panic alarm press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds The turn signals and horn will be activated The panic alarm will stop auto matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds To deactivate wait approximately 5 seconds and press the button again The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi cle Range The remote key has a range of approximately 60 ft 20 m from the vehicle Buildings or other obstacles may interfere 02 with the function of the remote key The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade see page 61 Unique functions PCC G021080 Gp Information button EN Indicator lights Pressing the information button provides cer tain information about the vehicle with the help of the i
383. tems The screen shows the current status settings for the vehicle s driver support systems Menu settings The following pages list the main menus sub menus and possible selections Car key memory See pages 86 and 57 for more information Lock settings Automatic door locking 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus See page 57 for more information Doors unlock All doors Driver door then all Keyless entry All doors Any door Doors on same side Both front doors Audible confirmation See page 57 and 63 for more information Reduced Guard Activate once Ask when exiting See page 70 for more information Side mirror settings Fold mirrors Tilt left mirror Tilt right mirror See page 103 for more information Light settings Door lock confirmation light Unlock confirmation light Approach light duration Off 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec See page 58 for more information Home safe light duration 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec See page 96 for more information Triple indicator See page 95 for more information Daytime running lights See page 92 for more information Active bending lights See page 93 for more information Tire pressure system Warns if tire pressure is too low 04 kk Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Calibrate tire pressure See page 309 for more information Steering wheel force High Medium Low See page 151 for more
384. ter the new code and press OK MENU Confirm the new code and press OK MENU If an incorrect code is entered the text Incorrect code is displayed If you have forgotten the access code 1 Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced settings menu and press OK MENU 2 Press and hold the OK MENU button for several seconds 3 The current code will be displayed Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with assistance SIRIUS ID This function displays the 12 digit Sirius acti vation ID Media player Disc slot O MEDIA button O Eject Number keys O TUNE Turn to navigate among menu selections folders tracks QO OK MENU Press to confirm your selec tion or access the menus for the currently selected source e g DISC Left right arrow keys Fast back forward and change track or chapter Q Forward back and change tracks or chap ter 1 DVDs only The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files e Purchased CDs CD Audio e Home burned CDs with audio and or video files e Home burned DVDs with audio and or video files e Purchased DVDs See page 226 for a list of compatible formats Media menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system Playing a disc Press MEDIA several times until Disc is dis played Release the button and wait several seconds or
385. that the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed and that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected e Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic weather e and road conditions The Function This in turn means that the functions of the Adaptive Cruise Control does not react ACC Distance Alert and Collision Warning section provides information about lim itations that the driver must be aware of to people or animals or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles It also does not react to slow moving System with Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection will not function before using this feature parked or approaching vehicles or sta oe oe Ges GE D EN i Weg 04 e This system is designed to be a supple tionary objects PE Ehe mentary driving aid It is not however e Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in intended to replace the driver s atten demanding driving conditions such as tion and judgement The driver is _ city driving or other heavy traffic situa tance and speed and must intervene if is a great deal of water or slush on the Adaptive Cruise Control does not main road during heavy rain or snow in poor tain a suitable speed or suitable dis visibility on winding roads or on high tance to the vehicle ahead way on or off ramps e Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician CA aton OOOO The surface of the radar in t
386. the bumper ie 08 Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun terclockwise Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise Insert a new bulb press it in and turn it clockwise Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock wise Taillight lens right side Parking side marker lights LED Side reflector Brake light Backup light Turn signal Brake lights LED If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been replaced con tact an authorized Volvo workshop G032485 The brake lights and taillights are replaced from inside the cargo area oR Before starting to replace a bulb see page 322 1 Open the panel 2 Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun terclockwise 3 Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise 4 Insert a new bulb press it in and turn it clockwise 5 Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock wise Cargo area lighting License plate lighting G031942 1 Remove the screws with a screwdriver 2 Carefully detach the entire bulb housing and pull it out Before starting to replace a bulb see page 322 Replace the bulb 4 Reinsert the entire bulb housing and 1 tighten the screws Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose Replace the bulb Check that the bulb illuminates and press it back into the bulb housing
387. the seat belt retract and pull it taut A sound from the seat belt retractor s automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal The seat belt should now be locked in place Ensure that the seat is securely in place 6 Push and pull the infant seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt WARNING It should not be possible to move the child restraint child seat more than 1 in 2 5 cm in any direction along the seat belt path The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely A i S 01 Safety 01 Convertible seats Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt e A small child s head represents a con siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak Volvo recom mends that children up to age 4 travel properly restrained facing rearward In addition Volvo recommends that chil dren should ride rearward facing prop erly restrained as long as possible Convertible child seats should be instal led in the rear seat only Route the seat belt through the convertible seat e A rear facing convertible seat should not be positioned behind the driver s seat WARNING G018630 L T g a 2 Femme unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas i installation senger s spal Always use a convertible seat that is suita
388. the driver ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode e when the brakes are applied if the driver s seat belt is taken off If the driver s door is opened if the gear selector is moved to N if the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 1 minute If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time such as when passing another vehicle ACC is deactivated temporarily and is reactivated when the pedal is released Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys tems such as the stability and traction control system DSTC If this system is not functioning properly adaptive cruise control is automati cally deactivated and will go into standby mode In the event of automatic deactivation an audi ble signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display The driver must then intervene and adapt the vehicle s speed to the surrounding traffic and regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead An automatic switch to standby mode may be caused if e the wheels lose traction e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is obstructed by for example wet snow or rain Queue Assist The following functions are linked to your vehi cle s automatic transmission and comprise the Queue Assist feature Please note that the lowest speed that can be set is 18 mph GO km h although ACC can maintain a set speed distance to a vehicle ahead down to a st
389. the electric parking brake is applied or Parking brake control wheels so that they point away from the released 1 Press firmly on the brake pedal curb e If the vehicle is pointing downhill turn the Push the control front wheels so that they point toward the gt The Es symbol in the instrument curb panel flashes while the parking bake is The parking brake should also be applied being applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied Low battery voltage 2 If the battery voltage is too low the parking brake cannot be applied or released Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low see page 114 3 Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill 4 When the vehicle is parked the gear selec tor must be in position P Information Provided by 03 Your driving environment EN Parking brake Symbols Releasing the electric parking brake For safety reasons the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat P FREE ma MESS aJe INE IME O belt mation display The electric parking brake will be ES A flashing symbol indicates that 03 Ken released immediately when the acceler the parking brake is being ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec applied If the symbol flashes in tor is in position D or R any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen Bacto ie sea
390. the function It will disappear after approx 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button A Auto braking was acti Auto braking has been active This message can be erased by pressing the READ button PY vated Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by KI blocked snow ice dirt etc on the windshield Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera see page 176 for more information on the camera s limitations 178 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co Collision warning with Full Auto brake and Pedestrian Detection Radar blocked See man Collision Warning and Auto brake are temporarily not functioning The radar sensor is blocked for ual example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor and cannot detect other vehicles see page 159 for more information on the radar sensor s limitations Collision warn Service Collision Warning and Auto brake are partially or completely not functioning required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display 04 w Option accessory for more information see Introduction 179 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 180 Driver Alert System Introduction The Driver Alert System is designed to help a driver who may be becoming fatigued or who is
391. the gear selector Never acceler ate until after you feel the transmission engage Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmis sion wear Selecting P or N when idling at a stand still for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the auto matic transmission fluid 3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving engine speed rpm will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature 03 kk D 03 Your driving environment 03 Starting the engine Switching off the engine With the engine running press the START STOP ENGINE button If the gear selector is not in the P position or if the vehicle is moving press the button twice or press and hold it in until the engine switches off Jump starting AER Connecting the jumper cables Follow these instructions to jump start your vehicle s dead battery or to jump start another vehicle s dead battery using your vehicle If the 12 volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle check that the vehicles are not touch ing to prevent premature completion of a cir cuit Be sure to follow jump starting instruc tions provided for the other vehicle To jump start your vehicle WARNING 1 Switch off the ignition set the ignition to PROPOSITION 65 WARNING mode 0 see page 82 pag Battery posts terminals and
392. the laser sensor and covers an area of approximately 1 50 x 1 10 in 0 5 x 3 mm or larger contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield see the illustration showing the location of the sensor on page 168 Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety functionality To help prevent reduced functionality please also observe the following e lf the windshield is replaced use the same type or a windshield approved by Volvo e When replacing windshield wipers use the same type or ones approved by Volvo 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 City Safety Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed The laser sensor INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MAGNIFIERS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Max average power 45mW Pulse duration 33ns Wavelength 905nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated July 26 2001 The upper decal describes the laser beam s classification and contains the following text Invisible Laser radiation Do not view directly with optical instruments magnifiers Class 1M laser product The lower decal describes the laser beam s physical data and contains the text IEC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with
393. the seat belt on the occupant Fastening a seat belt Buckling Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is heard The seat belt retractor is normally unlocked and you can move freely provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far Seat belt retractor The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol lowing situations if the belt is pulled out rapidly during braking and acceleration O e if the vehicle is leaning excessively when driving in turns O if the Automatic Locking Retractor Emer gency Locking Retractor ALR ELR is acti vated Each seat belt except for the driver s belt is equipped with the ALR ELR function which is designed to help keep the seat belt taut ALR ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible If this is done a sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible which is normal and the seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in place This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted See also page 38 for information about using a seat belt s ALR ELR function to anchor a child seat When wearing the seat belt remember e The belt should not be twisted or turned e The lap section of the belt must be posi tioned low on the hips not pressing against the abdomen e Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up into its retractor and that the shou
394. thin 16 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher tracks or to tune to the next previous are recommended for best sound reproduc j j tion strong radio station Steering wheel keypad with voice control button Volume Left right arrow keys A short press moves Eh EXIT Go higher in the menu system inter REN preset rt rad le on rupt the current function reject an incom a re ress an to Se within ing phone call or erase any characters tracks or to tune to the next previous entered in the display Press and hold to go strong radio station to the highest level in the current menu Volume From the highest level in the current menu EXIT Go higher in th i e ress and hold to go to the infotainment A IIA E See miair D view see page 208 rupt the current function reject an incom ing phone call or erase any characters 2 Models equipped with the optional navigation system only gt gt e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 209 CS 05 Infotainment 05 210 Getting started Scroll search forward and back Press briefly on 2 to scroll between CD tracks audio files or to search for the next available radio station Limitations The sound source AM FM1 Disc etc being played through the infotain ment system s speakers cannot be con trolled from the rear control panel Volume control right left sides a Serali searcn forward and back device using MODE the device must be In order to select an
395. tic oils Oil additives must not be used Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance services This oil is only used at customer request at additional charge Please consult your Volvo retailer Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use SAE 5W 30 will provide good fuel economy and engine protection See the viscosity chart G023491 Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation Synthetic oils meeting SAE OW 30 or OW 40 and complying with oil quality requirements are recommended for driving in areas of sustained temperature extremes hot or cold when tow ing a trailer over long distances and for pro longed driving in mountainous areas American Petroleum Institute API symbol G022917 The API Service Symbol donut is divided into three parts e The upper section describes the oil s per formance level e The center identifies the oil s viscosity e The lower section indicates whether the oil has demonstrated energy conserving properties in a standard test in comparison to a reference oil O1 10 00 11 Specifications 09 09 Specifications Oil volume 3 2 6 cyl B632454 S5 7 18 US qts 6 8 liters 3 0T 6 cyl B6304T4 7 18 US qts 6 8 liters Other fluids and lubricants Transmission oil Automatic TF 80SC 7 4 US qts 7 liters Transmission f
396. ting fading oxidation etc These coatings have not been tested by Volvo for compatibility with your vehicle s clear coat Some of them may cause the clear coat to soften crack or cloud Damage caused by application of paint protection coatings may not be cov ered under your vehicle s paint warranty Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod ucts recommended by Volvo Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product Upholstery care Fabric Clean with soapy water or a detergent For more difficult spots caused by oil ice cream shoe polish grease etc use a clothing fabric stain remover Consult your Volvo retailer Alcantera suede like material Suede like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution Leather care Volvo s leather upholstery is manufactured with a protectant to repel soiling Over time sunlight grease and dirt can break down the protection Staining cracking scuffing and fading can result Volvo offers an easy to use non greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beau tify your vehicle s leather and to renew the protective qualities of its finish The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight Volvo also offers a special leather softener that should be applied after the cleaner and pro tectant It leaves leather soft and smooth and redu
397. tion f A IAr IW H The decals shown in the Owner s Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle The purpose is to give an indi cation of how they look and their approxi mate location in the vehicle The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures step by step instructions or actions that must be carried out in a certain order are arranged in numbered lists in this manual If there is a series of illustrations associated with step by step instructions each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are car ried out is not important E gt Arrows with or without numbers are used to indicate the direction of a movement If there are no illustrations associated with a step by step list the steps in the procedure are indicated by ordinary numbers Position lists EP Red circles containing a number are used in general overview illustrations in which certain components are pointed out The corresponding number is also used in the position list s description of the various components Introduction Important information Bullet lists Bull
398. tion slot Press the START STOP ENGINE button gt A sound will be audible when the steer ing wheel lock releases Locking 1 Switch off the engine see page 114 for details E Option accessory for more information see Introduction 2 Remove the remote key from the ignition slot 3 Open the driver s door gt A sound will be audible when the steer ing wheel lock engages Vehicles with keyless drive 1 Switch off the engine see page 114 for details 2 Open the driver s door gt A sound will be audible when the steer ing wheel lock engages G044633 Keypads in the steering wheel Cruise control see page 152 Adaptive cruise control see page 154 Infotainment controls see page 207 03 Your driving environment Steering wheel Horn G044636 Horn Press the steering wheel hub to sound the horn Information Provided i El OI 03 Your driving environment Lighting Lighting panel o N E bel Y e jo Overview light switches Thumb wheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting Rear fog light 6 Headlights parking lights Instrument lighting Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary depending on ignition mode The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumb wheel High low beam hea
399. tions can also be controlled from the steering wheel keypad Each mode is described in its respec tive section Controls in the center console d ae sel Lg Su d e ve mo o J CO i ES 8 oT R 9 RADIO MEDIA TEL TUNE OK MENU Search paths Throughout this manual search paths to the menu system functions are listed as shown in the following example Audio settings gt Equalizer if the following steps have been taken first 1 Press the desired mode button RADIO MEDIA etc Continue pressing the button to navigate through the various selections displayed e g FM1 Release the button and wait several seconds to automatically accept the selection or turn TUNE and press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE or use the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to scroll to the desired menu selection such as Audio settings and press OK MENU to confirm a selection 3 Turn TUNE again to scroll to the desired submenu e g Equalizer where applica ble and press OK MENU 1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes RADIO menus Main AM menu AM menu Show presets Scan Audio settings Sound stage Equalizer Volume compensation Reset all audio settings Main FM1 FM2 menu FM menu Show radio text Show presets Scan Advanced settings Reset all FM settings Audio settings 05 Infotainment Main Sirius1 Sirius2 menu Lock options Change audio track Siri
400. to avoid battery drain Therefore be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place or outdoors before using the sys tem e Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System 7 Check the tire s inflation pressure on the gauge Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge 8 Refer to the tire inflation table in this chap ter for the correct inflation pressure If the tire needs to be inflated start the tire seal ing system s compressor press the on off switch to position l If necessary release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating 9 Turn off the compressor press the on off switch to position 0 when the correct infla tion pressure has been reached 10 Unscrew the hose from the tire s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap 11 Disconnect the electrical wire from the 07 12 volt socket 07 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Removing a wheel Location of jack towing eyelet and tools Spare wheel The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible The car s handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel The correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire pre
401. tors flash faster than normal the direction indicators are not functioning properly DSTC Ye san Sport mode This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta bility system s Sport mode has been activated to help provide maximum tractive force for example when driving with snow chains or driving in deep snow or loose sand Indicator and warning symbols Symbol Description Low oil pressure Parking brake applied SRS airbags Seat belt reminder Generator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning symbol Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving stop the vehicle stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level If the oil level is nor mal and the light stays on after restart have the vehicle towed to the nearest trained and quali fied Volvo service technician This is normal provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased NN Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied On models equipped with the electric parking brake this symbol flashes while the brake is being applied and then glows steadily A flashing symbol means that a fault has been detected See the message in the information display Rom Canadian models are equipped with this symbol See page 122 for more information about using the parking brake E Airbags SRS If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven or remains on for longer than appr
402. truck operator 06 During your trip CT 283 General information cccccccececececcccccececececaeacauauaucucececaeavauauauausenenaeanass 286 quite nlationmmrmrr A 289 bh aleet EE 291 Tire designations inse EE 292 Glossary Of TS TSENG OLOGY A andaban arena cade 294 VE de Up Tan 295 Biller 7 1 EE ele ul ER 297 Snow chains snow tires studded res 298 EN a A AA 299 MS A e a A EES 300 CHANGING a WISER eer De eene 306 Tire Pressure Monitoring System IPDM 309 284 b a DEALER WHEELS AND TIRES Lows st 07 Wheels and tires General information Introduction Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to the vehicle s tire information placard on the B pillar the structural member at the side of the vehicle at the rear of the driver s door opening CAUTION Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com bination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with consideration for hydroplaning resistance They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and depending on driving conditions may achieve a tread life of less than 20 000 miles 30 000 km Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo s advanced AWD or DSTC sys tem these tires are not designed for winter driving and should be replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate The tires have good road holding characteris tics and offer good handling on dry and
403. try modes see the following table EN Character entry field New contacts can be added in phone mode in Phone menu Phone book gt New contact 1 When Name is highlighted press OK MENU to go to the character entry mode see the illustration 2 Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK MENU to confirm The number letter keys on the center console can also be used 3 Continue to the next letter etc The name entered will be displayed in the character entry field 2 4 To switch from letter entry mode to the entry mode for numbers or special charac ters or to toggle between upper and lower case letters etc turn TUNE to one of the selections See the explanation in the fol lowing table in the list 1 and press OK MENU When you have finished entering the name select OK in the list in the display 1 and press OK MENU Continue by entering the phone number in the same way When you have entered the phone number press OK MENU and select a tag for the num ber Mobile phone Home Work or General Press OK MENU to confirm When all of the contact s information has been entered select Save contact in the menu to save 123 Toggle between letters and num ABC bers by pressing OK MENU More Switch to special characters by pressing OK MENU OK Save and return to Add contact by pressing OK MENU 05 Infotainment CS 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment Bluetooth hands free connection
404. ts e Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situa tions in slippery conditions when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road during heavy rain or snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on high way on or off ramps The distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane is monitored by a radar sensor Your vehi cle s speed is regulated by accelerating and braking The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system This is normal The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control system modulates the brakes Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg ulate speed However the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking This applies when there are great dif ferences in speed between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly Due to limitations in the radar sensor brak ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all see page 159 Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed However if the vehicle s speed falls below 18 mph 30 km h or if engine speed rpm becomes too low ACC disengages goes into standby mode and will no longer modulate the brakes The driver will then have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead 2 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Q
405. turer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufac turer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e achild or a small person occupies the front passenger s seat The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger s side front airbag is disabled The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console near the base of the rearview mirror When the ignition is switched on the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self diagnostic test However if a fault is detected in the system e The OWS indicator light will stay on e The SRS warning light see page 21 will come on and stay on e The message Pass Airbag OFF Service urgen 64 will be displayed in the informa tion display WARNING If a fault in the system is detected and indi cated as described be aware that the pas senger s side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision In this case the SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor should be inspected by a trained and quali fied Volvo service technician as soon as possible Occupant Weight Sensor e Never try to open remove or repai
406. ual contain informa tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page This information supplements the text that the footnote number refers to a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table Display texts There are several displays in the driver s field of vision that show messages generated by various systems and functions in the vehicle These texts are indicated in the Owner s Man ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur rounding text and are printed in gray for example Change doors unlock setting Decals There are various types of decals in the vehicle whose purpose is to provide important infor mation in a clear and concise way The impor tance of these decals is explained as follows in descending order of importance Risk of injury A G031590 Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back ground white text image on a black back ground Decals of this type are used to indicate potential danger Ignoring a warning of this type could result in serious injury or death Introduction Important information Risk of damage to the vehicle White ISO symbols and white text image on a black or blue warning background and space for a message If the information on decals of this type is ignored damage to the vehicle could result Information Ee o Ge co o ON White ISO symbols and white text image on a black background These decals provide gen eral informa
407. uetooth sys tem A list of compatible devices is available at you Volvo retailer or at www volvo cars us The vehicle s media player can only play audio files through the Bluetooth function Overview G045299 Sem Center console control panel VOL Volume contro MEDIA button TUNE Turn to navigate among menu alter natives and folders shown in the display a OK MENU Press to confirm your selec tion or access the menus EXIT Press to go back in the menu struc ture or cancel a function O Left right arrow keys Short press change tracks Long press fast forward reverse within a track The arrow keys on the steer ing wheel keypad can be used in the same way MEDIA menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad Bluetooth media See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system Pairing and connecting an external device Before an external device can be connected it must be paired to the infotainment system The procedure for connecting an external device varies depending whether or not the device has previously been paired to the infotainment system A maximum of 10 external devices can be paired and each device only needs to be paired once To pair a device 1 Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK MENU 2 Press OK MENU gt Whe
408. ueue Assist See page 158 for more information When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or is switched off completely the brakes will not be modulated automatically The driver must assume full control over the vehicle Warning light driver braking required Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40 of the vehicle s total braking capacity In situations requiring more brake force than ACC can pro vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes an audible signal from the Collision Warning system will sound and warning light will illumi nate see page 173 in the windshield to alert the driver to react Strong sunlight reflections extreme light contrasts the use of sunglasses or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the wind shield difficult to see F i R Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk ao Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 156 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi cles detected by the radar sensor see page 159 In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Steep inclines and or heavy loads ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level roads The system may have difficulty main taining th
409. us1 SIRIUS radio off Press RADIO button to activate SIRIUS Channel lock list Scan Unlock all channels Audio settings Temporarily unlock all chan Sirius2 nels Main DVD Video menu SIRIUS radio off Press RADIO button Change code ere men to activate SIRIUS DVD disc menu Audio settings Song memory Play Pause Continue Add song Stop MEDIA menus Song Seek Subtitles Delete song Main CD Audio menu Audio tracks y Disc menu iew song memo g ry Fandom Advanced settings 05 Channel list information Angle Scan Station name DivX VOD code Audio settings Artist Audio settings Title Main CD DVD Data menu o Information Disc menu lei dede Show presets Play Pause Random Category list Stop Sean Advanced SIRIUS settings SSES sath t fold Audio settings Skip options SEH Channel skip list Change subtitles 1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes kk Option accessory for more information see Introduction 257 CS 05 Infotainment Main USB menu Main AUX menu Change phone USB menu AUX menu Remove Bluetooth device Play Pause AUX input volume Phone settings Stop Audio settings Discoverable Random Sounds and volume Repeat folder TEL menus Download phone book Select USB device Main Bluetooth hands free menu Bluetooth software version in Change subtitles Phone menu car Change audio track Call lists Call options Scan All calls Auto answer Audio settings Missed calls Voicemail number G
410. ver stand next to the tire being inflated when the compressor is in operation e f cracks bubbles etc form on the tire switch off the compressor immediately e lf there is visible damage to the sidewall or the rim the tire cannot be repaired The vehicle should not be driven if this occurs Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approxi mately 88 psi 6 bar while the sealing com pound is being pumped into the tire The pressure should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds 10 Within seven minutes inflate the tire to between 22 44 psi 1 8 3 0 bar Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating WARNING If the pressure remains below 22 psi 1 8 bar after approximately seven minutes turn off the compressor In this case the hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle should not be driven 11 Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12 volt socket 12 Unscrew the hose from the tire s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap 13 Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi mately 2 miles 8 km at a maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h to distribute the seal ing compound in the tire OD CAUTION
411. version of the car s current speed from mph to km h Current fuel consumption Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every second The information on the display is updated every few seconds When the vehicle is stationary appears on the display Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the last reset Reset using RESET Driving distance on current fuel reserve This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles 80 km of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading was taken When the message miles to empty tank appears in the display refuel as soon as possible The actual distance that can be driven on the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be influenced by a change in driving style See also page 262 for information on driving economically Resetting 1 Select mph average speed or mpg average 2 Press and hold RESET for approx 1 sec ond to reset the selected function If RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure seconds Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously 04 e Information Provided Stability system Introduction The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system DST
412. volume in the RSE menu under A V AUX input volume Activating RSE The RSE system can be activated using con trols on the front or rear screens From the front seat press MEDIA see the fol lowing illustration and select RSE From the rear seat press the screen s On Off button Use the remote control s Lem button to select a screen L left rear screen or R right rear screen Point the remote control toward the selected screen s IR transceiver and con tinue by pressing the MEDIA or RADIO button on the remote control to select a source such as Disc etc Settings made from the front center control panel D E e e A x d MEDIA TUNE OK MENU EXIT Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel An audio video source for the rear screen s can be selected from the front center control panel The same source can be selected for ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction both rear screens or different sources can be selected for the respective screens 1 Press MEDIA several times to come to RSE on the front screen Wait several sec onds for your selection to be confirmed 2 Turn TUNE to select one or both of the rear screens and confirm by pressing OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to select RADIO MEDIA or RSE settings Press OK MENU to con firm 4 Turn TUNE to the desired source for example Disc and confirm by pressing O
413. with the infotainment volume control The level can also be set in the MY CAR menu system see page 134 If the volume of another source from the audio system is high this will be automatically low ered Park assist Rear park assist EI The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft 1 5 m The audible signal comes from the rear speakers G031400 The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer carrying bicycles in a rear mounted carrier etc which could trigger the rear park assist system s sensors Rear park assist is deactivated automati cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 187 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 188 Front park assist G031401 PIDO DD A The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2 5 ft 0 8 m The audible sig nal comes from the audio system s front speakers It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system s sensors Front park assist is deactivated when the parking brake is applied and or when the gear selector is in the P position Faults in the system If the information symbol illuminates and Park assist syst Service required is shown on the information display this indicates tha
414. y e The next time a door is opened by a person with the same PCC in his her possession the driver s seat and door mirrors will auto matically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently locked If several people carrying PCCs approach the vehicle at the same time the driver s seat and door mirrors will assume the posi tions they were in for the person who opens the driver s door See also page 85 for information on adjusting and storing the seat s position in the seat mem ory Keyless drive information messages If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is in mode Il See page 82 and all of the doors are closed a message will appear in the instru ment panel display and an audible signal will sound When at least one PCC has been returned to the car the message will be erased in the dis play and the audible signal will stop when e A door has been opened and closed e The PCC has been inserted in the ignition slot e The READ button see page 131 for the location of this button has been pressed Keyless drive OD CAUTION e Keyless drive remote keys should never be left in the vehicle In the event of a break in a remote found in the vehicle could make it possible to start the engine e Electromagnetic fields or metal obstructions can interfere with the key less drive system Avoid placing the remote key near cellula
415. y do not attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery see below This may cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs Automatic transmission Before attempting to tow the vehicle 1 Switch off the ignition for at least 10 minutes and disconnect the battery 2 Follow the instructions for manually overriding the shiftlock system on page EE 01 kk A SOS S 01 Safety Supplemental Restraint System SRS Front airbags o e P E o The front airbag system The front airbags supplement the three point seat belts For these airbags to provide the protection intended seat belts must be worn at all times The front airbag system includes gas genera tors surrounded by the airbags and decelera tion sensors that activate the gas generators causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas o IAS As the movement of the seats occupants com presses the airbags some of the gas is expel led at a controlled rate to provide better cush ioning Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy minimizing seat belt slack The entire process including inflation and deflation of the airbags takes approximately one fifth of a sec ond The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
416. y vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle If there is a risk of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light and an audible warning signal Collision warn ing is active at speeds above 3 mph 4 km h Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase after the collision warning has been given Brake Support is activated Brake Support prepares the brake system to react quickly and the brakes are applied slightly This may be expe rienced as a light tug If the brakes are applied quickly full braking effect will be provided Brake Support also increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pres sure on the brake pedal Auto brake If a collision is imminent and the driver has not applied the brakes or begun to steer around the vehicle or pedestrian the auto brake function is activated without the driver pressing the brake pedal Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle s speed when the collision occurs or limited brake force is applied if this is sufficient to avoid the collision The auto brake and brake support functions are always on and cannot be turned off Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Co 04 kk 173 Co 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 174 Collision warning with Full Auto br
417. y approx imately 60 ft 20 m from the vehicle See page 61 for information on replacing the battery Common functions Remote key Personal Car Communicator PCC G021079 Personal Car Communicator PCC Al Lock Al Unlock Ee Approach lighting K Tailgate unlock A Panic alarm Buttons on the remote Lock Press the Lock button on the remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate The turn signals will flash once to confirm lock ing Unlock Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver s door 58 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade After a short pause press the Unlock button a second time within 10 seconds to unlock the other doors and the tailgate This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time by pressing My Car and going to Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings Change doors unlock setting See page 133 for a description of the menu system Approach lighting As you approach the vehicle press the button on the remote key to light the interior lighting parking lights license plate lighting and the lights in the door mir rors These lights will switch off automatically after 30 60 or 90 seconds See page 133 for a description of the menu system lt 3 Unlock tailgate Press the button twice within several seconds to disarm the alarm sys
418. y object or body part though the open laminated panoramic roof even if the vehicle s ignition is completely switched off Automatic operation 1 Toopenthe sun shade completely pull the control as far back as possible to the auto open position and release it 2 To fully open the laminated panoramic roof pull the control as far back as possible a second time to the auto open position and release it Quick open close The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade can be opened closed at the same time e Open pull the control back to the auto open position twice in quick succession and release it e Close push the control forward to the auto close position twice in quick succes sion and release it Manual operation 1 Opening the sun shade Pull the control back to the first stop the manual open position and hold it until the sun shade has opened to the position of your choice 2 Opening the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof Pull the control back to the first stop the manual open position a second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof 3 Opening the front glass section Pull the control back to the first stop the manual open position a third time and hold it until the laminated panoramic roof has opened to the position of your choice Perform this procedure in reverse order to close the laminated panoramic roof and or sun shade For manual opening the sun shade
419. your Volvo retailer or at www volvocars us WARNING Never use the hands free feature or any other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely Distraction can lead to a serious accident Compliance FCC IC common sentence This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including inter ference that may cause undesired operation of this device USA FCC ID A269ZUA130 FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment IC RSS Gen This equipment complies with FCC IC radia tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency RF Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS 102 of the IC radio frequency RF Exposure rules This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com ply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation MPE But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 in 20 cm and more between the radiator and person s body excluding extremities hands wrists feet and ankles Canada IC 700BIAM2101 05 Infotainment Bluetooth hands free connection 05 kk CS 05 Infotainment

Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents